SIEMENS

Overviews
Sequential Control and GRAPH 5

SlMATlC S5

GRAPH 5 Overview

GRAPH 5/11

Creating Sequencers
Process Synchronization

Manual

GRAPH 5 Diagnosis
Structure of the Data Blocks
Notes on Installation
and Testing
Appendix

ESD Guidelines
User Notes
Remarks Forms

Copyright
Copyright O Siemens AG 1994 All Rights Reserved
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without
express written authority. Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights
created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved.

Liability disclaimer
We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with the hardware and software
described. Since deviations cannot be excluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full agreement.
However, the data in this manual are reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections
included in subsequent editions. Suggestions for improvement are welcomed.
Technical data subject to change.

Safety-related guidelines
This manual contains certain notices which you should observe to ensure your own
personal safety, as well as to protect the product and connected equipment. These notices
are highlighted in the manual by a warning triangle and are marked as follows according to
the level of danger:

A
A

Warning
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial damage to property
can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper
precautions are not taken.

Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment.
Qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, to ground
and to tag equipment, systems and circuits in accordance with established safety
practices and standards.
Bestell-Nr. 6ES5998-1FA23

Contents

Contents

................................................1 .1
Guide to the Manual .......................................1 .2
Graphic User Interface .....................................1 .3
Selection Functions ........................................1 .4
Sequential Control and GRAPH 5 ...........................2 .1
What is a Sequential Control System? ........................2 .2
WhatisGRAPHS? ........................................2 - 7
How does GRAPH 5 Function? ..............................2 .13
The Elements of GRAPH 5 .................................2 .14
Overviews

Elements at the Overview Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 .14

Programming at the Zoom-in Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 .21
Waiting and Monitoring Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 .22
Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 .22
Multistep Zoom.in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 .22
Program Structure of a Sequencer with GRAPH 5
2 .23
Example With and Without Using GRAPH 5
2 .25

.............
..................
GRAPH 5 Overview .......................................3 .1
Product Overview: the Components of GRAPH 5 ..............3 .2
PG Components: The Packages ..............................3 .3
GRAPH 5 Editing Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 .3
GRAPH 5 Diagnosis: Monitoring and Operating Sequencers. . . . . . . . 3 .3
PLC Components: The Function Blocks
3 .4

......................
Creating Sequencers .......................................4 .1
Introduction ..............................................4 .2
Call Diagrams ............................................4 .3
Call Diagram
Call Diagram
Call Diagram
Call Diagram

Using
Using
Using
Using

FB 70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
FB 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
FB 73 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
FB 70171 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

.3
.4
.5
.6

Contents

.............................

4 .7
Creating Functional Sequencers
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .7
Entering a Sequencer (SBx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .12
Generating the Required Data Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .13
FB Selection / SB Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .14
Programming the OB, Assigning Parameters for the FB . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .16
Restrictions when Creating Sub-Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .17
Operation with Several SBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .17
Further Restrictions / Limit Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .18
Loading and Starting the Sequencer
4 .19
Creating Sequencers on the PG
4 .21
Structure of the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .21
ID Screen Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .21
Overview Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .21
Zoom-in Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .21
Editing Mode / Output Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .21
Functions and Keys available in GRAPH 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .22
Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .24
The Zoom-in Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .26
Titles/Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .27
Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .30
Deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .31
Activating the Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .32
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .32
Main Menu of GRAPH 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .33
Creating Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .35
Programming the ID Screen Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .36
Programming at the Overview Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .39
Start of the Sequencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .39
Changing the SB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .40
Step/Transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .41
Simultaneous Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .44
Alternative Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .46
Jump Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .48
End of a Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .49
Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .50
Init Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .51
Sub-Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .52

.........................
..............................

Contents
Initial Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .53
Permanent Step/ Selective Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .53
Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .55
Exchanging Contents of Steps or Transitions at the Zoom-in Level . . 4 .57
Copying the Contents of a Step or Transition at the Zoom-in Level . . 4 .58
Completing Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .59
Zoom-in Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .61
Programming Steps/Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .61
Flag 233.0 in Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .62
Flag 233.0 in Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .63
Segment Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .64
Multistep Zoom-Ins (MSZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .68
Empty Steps/ Empty Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .75
Creating the Data Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .76
Fast Re-Translation of Sequence Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .77
Cross Reference Lists with GRAPH 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .78
Rewiring GRAPH 5 Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .78
Printing out a Sequence Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .78
Call Structure
4 .79
4 .81
Nesting Main and Sub-Sequences
Further Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .81
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .82
Preparations in the Main Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .82
Creating the Sub.Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .85
Generating the Corresponding DB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .85
Loading in the PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .85
4 .87
Testing and Starting Up
Transferring the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .87
GRAPH 5 Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .87
The Standard Blocks
4 .91
Fast Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .92
FB 72 /SB 2 for Linear, Alternative and Simultaneous Sequences . . . . 4 .92
FB 73/SB 3 for Linear and Alternative Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .93
FB 74, Additional Functions for FB 72/73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .96
Description of the Modes of FB 72 and FB 73 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .99
Description of the Modes of FB 74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .104
Possible Modes of FB 72, FB 73 and FB 74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .107
Standard Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .109

.............................................
............................

....................................

.......................................

Contents
FB 701SB 0 for a Main Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .109
FB 711SB 0 for Sub-Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .117
Description of the Modes of FB 70171. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .123
Possible Modes for the Sequencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .129
Switching Over Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .130
Cold Restart Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .135
Additional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .139
FB 75 for Additional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .139
Description of the Modes of FB 75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .143
Response to a Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .145
Possible Block Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .146
Programming Examples for Implementing Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .147
Example of Planning and Starting Up
4 .165
Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .166
Conceptphase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1 6 6
Planning on the Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .168
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .172
Preparing for Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .172
Programming on the PG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .174
Entering the Waiting and Monitoring Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .177
Starting Up and Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .178
Transferring the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .178
Generating the Diagnosis DB and the Working DB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .178
Calling FB 73 in the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .179
Testing the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .180
Printing Out the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .180
Programming StepIMSZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .181
Permanent Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .181
Selective Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .182
Multistep Zoom-In (MSZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .183

........................

....................................5 .1
Introduction ..............................................5 .2
Process Synchronization

Guide to the Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 .3

Overview of Process Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 .4
Synchronization Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 .7
Single Candidate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 .8
Multistep Zoom-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 .11

Contents

.................................

Description of the Structure

5 .12
Call Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 .12
Overview of the Standard Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 .13
Creating Supplementary Conditions on the PG
5 .14
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 .14
Selecting Synchronization Conditions for Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 .14
Programming Rules for Automatic Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 .16
Display of Automatically Generated Synchronization Conditions . . . . 5 .18
Supplementing Automatically Generated Synchronization Conditions 5 .21
Integrating Process Synchronization
5 .24
Loading in the PLC
5 .25
Testing and Starting Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 .25
Activating Process Synchronization
5 .26
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 .26
Support by the Standard SB 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 .26
DB<GS.sequence> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 .26
Example of Handling the Data Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 .29
Process Synchronization Based on an Example
5 .31
Description of the Operating Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 .32
Programming Steps and Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 .32
Synchronization Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 .37
Evaluation of Automatically Generated Synchronization Conditions . . 5 .41
Restricting Multiple Candidates using Additional Information . . . . . . . 5 .43

................

..........................
........................................
..........................

................

.......................................6 .1
Introduction ..............................................6 .2
GRAPH 5 Diagnosis

Difference between GRAPH 5 Diagnosis. Stage V and V1. . . . . . . . . . 6 .3

Guide to the Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 .4
Overview of Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 .5
Single Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 .7
Group Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 .8
Hardware and Software Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 .9
Understanding the Diagnostic Program
6 .11
Program Execution on the PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 .11
Blocks on the PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 .12
Structures on the PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 .13

.......................

Contents
Mode of Operation on the PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 .14
Preparing the Diagnostic Program
6 .15
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 .15
Editing the Parameter Data DB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 .15
Integration in the User Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 .16
Transferring and Testing the Diagnostic Program
6 .18
Loading on the PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 .18
Test and Start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 .18
Working with Diagnosis on the PG
6 .19
User Interface, Selectable Functions on the PG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 .19
Basic Functions for Diagnosis on the PG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 .20
Overview of the Main Functions on the PG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 .21
Group Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 .22
Step Sequence Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 .25
Step Sequence Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 .28
Criteria Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 .31
Operating Screen Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 .34
Example of GRAPH 5 Diagnosis
6 .39
Blocks on the PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 .39
Programming Start-up OBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 .40
Block Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 .40
Blocks for the Cyclic Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 .41
Detailed Description of the FB
6 .43
FB 69 Start.Up, Operation and Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 .43
FB 68, Write Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 .52
FB 67, Read Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 .54

...........................
..............

...........................

.............................

...............................

................................7 .1
Assignment of the Working DB: DB<GS:Sequence> ............7 .2
Assignment of the GRAPH 5 Diagnostic DB: DB<GS:DIAG> ....7 .17
Assignment of the GRAPH 5 Diagnostic Parameters:
DB<GS:PARA> ...........................................7 .29
Assignment of the Diagnostic DB: DB<DIAG>.................7 .30
Structure of the Data Blocks

Contents

............................8 .1
Fast Version ..............................................8 .2
Notes on Installation and Testing

List of Some Basic Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 .2

Examples for Estimating the Processing Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 .3
Standard Version
8 .17
List of Some Basic Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 .17
Examples for Estimating the Processing Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 .19
Comparison of the Fast Version with the Standard Version
8 .27
8 .29
Blocks and PLC
8 .30
Compatibility with Earlier Releases

..........................................

......
...........................................
..........................
Appendix .................................................9 .1
Abbreviations .............................................9 .2
Glossary .................................................9 .7
S5 File Types..............................................9 .19
Further Reading ..........................................9 .21
Index ....................................................9 .23

Overviews

Guide to the Manual

1.1

Guide to the Manual

Software
user's contract

Before installing the software, please read the software user's

contract and the Product Information carefully.
The instructions for installing and setting up the PG, handling
diskettes and hard disk drives can be found in the PG manuals.
The procedure for installing the GRAPH 5/11 software package is
described in the Product Information.

Back-up copy

Make at least one back-up copy of all original diskettes.

Starting the S5 menu manager is also described in the SS-DOS
manual.
This manual describes the functions of GRAPH 5/II. For
programming at the zoom-in level, you require knowledge of
STEP 5. To run the program on the PLC, you must call the
function blocks for the specific PLC (FB 70, FB 71 etc.) for the
required version of the sequential control system, assign
parameters and transfer the program to the PLC memory using the
standard FBs. In this context, we recommend the following
documentation:
- manual for the STEP 5 basic package,
- manuals for the programmable controllers, e.g. S5-155U.
These manuals also include programming guides.

Ovenliews

1.2

Graphic User Interface

As in STEP 5, all the GRAPH 5/11 functions are available via the
main and submenus. Within these menus, you can use either the
mouse or keyboard to select the tools and utilities you require
during your session at the PG.

Function selection

Calling a function or an editor requires two steps:

-

select the function in the main or submenu,

specify the function by entering parameters and confirming
with the return key.

Selection Functions

1.3

Selection Functions
Starting in the main menu, you select a function or an editor via
the appropriate submenus. The current operating status or mode of
the PG determines whether or not certain functions can be
activated or not, e.g. when there is no connection to a PLC.
For further information, refer to the STEP 5 manual.

Sequential Control and GRAPH 5

Sequential Control and GRAPH 5

What is a Sequential Control System?

In control engineering, a distinction must be made between logic

control systems and sequential control systems. Logic control
systems describe the static relationships between the input and
output signals of a controller. Control tasks in which the timing of
inputs and outputs is important, are implemented by sequential
control systems.
A mode of control, forcing step-by-step sequential operation, one
step proceeding to the next programmed step dependent on step
enabling conditions is known as a sequential control system.
There are two different types of sequential control system:
Sequential control system

/
time-driven

\
event-driven

The step enabling conditions are only dependent on the time (e.g.
waiting or monitoring times).
The step enabling conditions are dependent on signals from the
process being controlled (e.g. on acknowledgements/feedback).

In practice, a combination of the two is usually found.

What is a Sequential Control System?

The main characteristics of sequential control systems are steps

and step enabling conditions. The control task is divided into
single steps whose execution is dependent on step enabling
conditions.
Each step is assigned control operations and step enabling
conditions.

conditions

Start condition

Step 1

Step enabling
conditions

l
1

Step enabling
conditions
for step n

Step enabling cond 1

Step enabling cond 2

U
Step 3

Command X
Step enabling cond n - l

Step n

Representation of sequence

Representation of sequence

using the conventional method

(complyingwith IEC DIS 1131-3

(complying with DIN 40719)

and IEC 848 standards)

Sequential Control and GRAPH 5

Sequential control
system

The step enabling conditions allow the program to continue from

one step to the next. The operations within a step consist of
instructions for internal and external units (e.g. set flag, start
timer, switch control elements).

Structure of a
sequential control
system

In general, a sequential control system consists of the following:

mode section,
sequencer,
command output.

Start

Stop

Automatic Single step Jogging

Mode section
Signals

Enable

about
mode
Step enabling
conditions

m
r
Sequencer

Manual control

Enable

Interlock

Command output

Control commands

Control commands
-

What is a Sequential Control System?

The preset parameters for the operating mode are processed in the
mode section. The result is passed on to the sequencer and to
command output in the form of signals (e.g. enable).
The sequencer ensures that the control is executed step-by-step.
Depending on the step enabling conditions, the program proceeds
from one step to the next.
Step enabling conditions

Il

12

13

Start

+Sequence
continues
S

Q1

Q2

Q3

Outputs

Basic structure of a sequencer (in conventional notation)

A step corresponds to a flip-flop. The output sends commands,
initializes the next step and resets the previous step. The
sequencer continues depending on the step enabling conditions.
The output of the control command can be directly from the step
itself; however, the commands are usually sent to the control
elements via the command output.

In the command output the step operations of the sequencer are

logically linked with the signals from the mode section and the
interlocks.
The outputs are commands to the control elements.

Sequential Control and GRAPH 5

Apart from the benefits when programming, GRAPH 5 also has

the following advantages:
-

GRAPH 5 provides clearly defined functions for project

planning on the programmer.

GRAPH 5 is a powerful structuring tool for economic creation

of programs.

GRAPH 5 converts the planned sequence structure into a

program automatically.

GRAPH 5 allows fast diagnosis from the overview to the

detailed level.

GRAPH 5 provides convenient documentation.

With GRAPH 5, sequencers can be programmed clearly, reliably

and quickly. Programming with GRAPH 5 is easy to learn and use.

What is GRAPH 5?

2.2

What is GRAPH 5?
GRAPH 5 is a software package for graphic planning and
programming of sequential control systems and is an extension of
STEP 5.
With GRAPH 5, a step-by-step program sequence (sequential
controller) required to meet the technical demands of your plant
can be planned as an overview. The zoom-in or detailed
representation is then programmed in LAD, CSF or STL.
GRAPH 5

GRAPH 5
is available on the PG as a programming package
allows a sequencer to be structured by breaking it down into
steps (actions) and transitions (step enabling conditions)
- supports planning and design, programming, documentation,
testingldiagnosis
- supports programming at the overview and zoom-in levels
- supports the various modes and functions of the process
sequence and its diagnosis by means of standard blocks on the
PLC.
-

~~~~
GRAPH 5

diagnosis

Sequential Control and GRAPH 5

A sequencer is programmed with GRAPH 5 in two levels of

representation:
Representation at the overview

Representation at the zoom-in

level

level
Actions

Step

Transition

The overview level

The overall structure of the sequencer is created at the overview

level. Steps and transitions, simultaneous and alternative branches
and their junctions, as well as jumps, can be programmed. Waiting
and monitoring times can be entered.

The zoom-in level

At the zoom-in level the contents of the steps and transitions are
programmed using the zoom-in function:
- the actions in the step
- the step enabling conditions in the transition

What is GRAPH 5?

Representation at the overview level

Example: powder press
CI

Material introduced

I I I
S

Lower die

T2i
Pressing completed

m
p, 1

T4

Raise die

Lower mold

- - - - - - - - - -

Mold lowered

Remove pellet

Tm
5"',oval

completed

p, I
T6

F
I

Raise mold

- - - - - - - - - -

Mold raised

D
U

Sequential Control and GRAPH 5

Representation at the zoom-in level

Example: powder press, transition 2 and step 5
TRANSITION 2

PRESSING END?

LIMIT SWITCH

MAN-ENAB

LIMIT SWITCH

5.0

LOWER DIE POSITION

AUTO-ENAB

233.0

CURRENT STEP FLAG

STEP 5

REMOVAL OF PELLET

AUTO-ENAB
EMER STOP
MAN ENAB
MAN-5
EMER STOP

VALVEIM

AUTO-ENAB =

F 233.0

EMERSTOP =

MAN-ENAB

F 205.6

MAN-5

18.7

VALVEIM

Q 6.0

4.1

CURRENT STEP FLAG (AUTO)

EMER OFF (DISABLE OUTPUTS)
MAN FLAG

REMOVAL

What is GRAPH 5?

After planning the structure of the sequencer at the overview level

and programming the steps and transitions at the zoom-in level,
the sequential control program is completely established.
GRAPH 5 therefore provides you with an interface with which
you can create straightforward sequential control systems easily
and quickly.
Apart from supporting planning and programming, GRAPH 5 also
supports documentation and testingldiagnosis.

Documentation
During planning and programming, you can:
enter comments for the steps and transitions at the overview
level
- enter (stepltransition) segment titles, statement and segment
comments and display the assignment list of symbols used at
the zoom-in level.
-

You can print the following:

sequencer identification screen form
overview level with all comments
list of all transitions and transition comments
list of all steps with step comments and corresponding waiting
and monitoring times
- all the transitions at the zoom-in level with transition
comments (segment titles), statement comments, assignment
list of the symbols used
- all the steps at the zoom-in level with step comments (segment
titles), statement comments, assignment list of the symbols
used
-

Sequential Control and GRAPH 5

Test and diagnosis

The current status of the sequencer is displayed in a status display,

i.e. active steps are clearly marked. The status of individual steps
and transitions can also be followed at the zoom-in level, with the
statuses of individual operands and logic operations displayed on
the screen.
If a timeout occurs, the affected sequencer is indicated. The cause
of the timeout can be traced from the overview level through to
the zoom-in level. If you select the sequencer involved, you can
display the affected step (steps). You can find out the exact cause
of the timeout at the zoom-in level.

GRAPH 5 diagnosis (" GS-DIAG " package)

With the group diagnosis function you can monitor up to four
PLCs simultaneously. Using the criteria analysis function, you can
display unsatisfied assignments and their criteria. In the operating
field, preset and current parameters of the FB are displayed in the
CSF representation. Changes to the current parameters can also be
made on the PG.

How does GRAPH 5 Function?

2.3

How does GRAPH 5 Function?

A sequence control system is characterized by its steps, i.e. by the
subdivision of a control task into individual sequence steps. It
proceeds to the next step depending on the step enabling
conditions.
With GRAPH 5, the structure of the sequencer is determined by
the following:

1. Step:
Description of the actions executed by the sequencer when a
certain status exists. These actions are programmed at the zoom-in
level; a flag (F 233.0) is used as a substitute for the enable signal
for the modes AUTOMATIC, STEP SELECTION and EXECUTE.
for the mode HAND, flag F 205.6 serves as the enable signal.

2.Transition:
Description of the step enabling conditions with which a
sequencer changes from one status to the next (i.e. proceeds from
one step to the next). These step enabling conditions are
programmed at the zoom-in level. The result of logic operation
(RLO) is not the definitive step enabling condition, it can, in some
cases, still be corrected by the GRAPH 5 program,
e.g. waiting times not yet elapsed etc. Flag 233.0 is used to
activate the next step(s).
For planning and programming using the PG, the GRAPH 5 PG
software is necessary. The program for a sequential control system
is created offline.
To run the program on a programmable logic controller (PLC), the
standard function blocks for GRAPH 5 are necessary. These FBs
are available for specific PLCs. The FBs are used to implement
the modes of the sequencer. Per sequencer at least one standard
block is called and assigned parameters. Test and diagnosis are
executed online with the PLC.

Sequential Control and GRAPH 5

2.4

The Elements of GRAPH 5

You create GRAPH 5 programs at the following levels of
representation:
overview level
zoom-in level
At the overview level, you specify the overall structure of your
program.
At the zoom-in level, you can then program these sections in
detail.

2.4.1

Elements at the
Overview Level

The elements result from a series of steps and transitions. The

following rule applies:
Every transition must follow a step and every step must follow a
transition.

Linear sequence

The sequence proceeds from Sn to

When Ti switches, Sn+l is
activated and Sn deactivated. If several steps follow on in a linear
sequence, they are lined up one after the other.

The Elements of GRAPH 5

Opening a
simultaneous
branch

Several steps are activated simultaneously by only one transition.

The sequence proceeds from Sn to Sn+l and S k l and ... Ski within
a PLC cycle.
When Ti switches, Sn+l to Ski are activated and Sn is deactivated
(corresponds to an AND sequence).

Closing a
simultaneous
branch

Simultaneous branches are joined again by means of the

synchronization. The sequencer proceeds from Sn and Skl and ...
Ski to Sn+l within a PLC cycle.
Ti becomes valid when all the preceding steps Sn to Ski are active.
When Ti switches, these steps are deactivated, Sn+l is activated.

Note
Every simultaneous branch must run through as far as the
junction.

Sequential Control and GRAPH 5

Alternative branch

One of the branches will be run through. The sequencer proceeds

from Sn to Sn+l or (exclusive) Skl or... Ski within a PLC cycle.
As soon as Sn is active, all the transitions Til to Tin are
processed. The transition with a satisfied enabling condition will
switch.

Note
If possible, the step enabling conditions of the transitions Til to
Tin should be mutually exclusive. If the conditions for several
transitions are satisfied simultaneously, the transition furthest
left will be enabled (corresponds to OR sequence).

The Elements of GRAPH 5

Alternative
junction (graphic)

When alternative branches join again, the following step Sn+l will
be activated when one of the previous transitions Til to Tin
switches. The sequencer therefore proceeds from Sn or Skl or...
Ski to the next step within a PLC cycle.

Jump
end of sequence
alternative
junction

The sequencer proceeds from Sn to Sk (as with the linear

sequence, however, without a graphic connection). When Til
switches, Sn is deactivated and Sk is activated.

A graphic reference is automatically stored at the jump destination.

Sequential Control and GRAPH 5

Initial step/
selective
step

Initial step
This is activated at the start of the sequencer without the
conditions being checked and
- it becomes active after the jump to S 0 when the sequencer is
running cyclically.
-

Selective step
The action part of a step marked as selective is only processed
when the step is active. Normally (without selective steps) all the
steps of the sequencer are run through cyclically; if a step is not
active, the actions are carried out with RLO=O. With a selective
step, the action part is skipped if the step is not active.
You can use selective steps, for example, for process sequence
counters.

Noteassignments remain set. You may need to delete them.

The

The Elements of GRAPH 5

You can program the structure of your sequencer with these

elements.
By nesting parallel and alternative branches, complex structures
can be created, as shown below:

Sequential Control and GRAPH 5

The following constructions are not possible:

Note
Rvo branches following each other immediately must have a
step between them.
Each simultaneous branch must be opened and closed
graphically.
Alternative branches within simultaneous branches must be
closed before the junction.
Jumps between different simultaneous branches are not
permitted since they generally cause an incorrect response in
the sequencer.

The Elements of GRAPH 5

2.4.2

Programming at
the Zoom-in Level

The steps and transitions are programmed at the zoom-in level, i.e.
their content is specified in LAD, CSF or STL.

Programming the
steps

Steps are the active part of the sequencer. Commands, e.g. to

actuators, load and transfer operations, starting timers and
counters and FB calls are programmed in the steps. The step flag
is assigned by GRAPH 5; the action part can be programmed as
required for the task in hand. Interlocks are programmed at the
same time (single control element).
STEP FLAG
EMER OFF
MAN ENAB
MAN 2
EMER OFF

Programming the
transitions

MOTOR 2

Transitions are the step enabling conditions for the steps. The
conditions that must be satisfied (RLO=l) to allow the next step
(or steps) to be activated must be programmed.

Note
Only the last result of logic operation (RLO) before the end of
the transition (BE) decides whether or not the transition
switches.

Sequential Control and GRAPH 5

2.4.3
Waiting and
Monitoring Times

A waiting and a monitoring time can be assigned to every step.

Waiting time

This is the minimum time TW, for which a step remains enabled
even if the following transition has already been satisfied. The
next step will only become active after the waiting time has
elapsed.

Monitoring time

Maximum monitoring time

The program checks whether or not the step enabling conditions
for the next step become active within a preset time (TM). The
sequencer must switch to the next step before TM elapses,
otherwise a timeout will be detected.
Minimum monitoring time
By assigning appropriate FB parameters, you can have the TW
interpreted as a minimum monitoring time TM-MIN. Here, the
program checks whether the step enabling conditions for the next
step are fulfilled before the time has elapsed. If this is the case, an
error message is displayed.
You can specify different values for TM and TW in every step.
You simply need to enter time values. The time function does not
need to be scanned in the next transition, but is evaluated
automatically by the standard function blocks for the modes.

2.4.4
Comments

2.4.5
Multistep Zoom-in

You can specify a comment for every step and transition. The
comments are displayed both at the overview and at the zoom-in
level.

Refer to Chapter 4.

Program Structure of a Sequencer with GRAPH 5

2.5

Program Structure of a Sequencer with GRAPH 5

On the following page, you will see an overview of the interaction
of the individual components of a sequencer.
The program structure shown in the diagram is largely generated
and managed by the GRAPH 5 software program. The creation of
the program (sequence block and data block) is supported by the
programmer.
To run the program on the programmable logic controller, you
must call and assign parameters (modes, sequence block number
etc.) to the standard function block "main sequence".
The structure of the sequencer and all the actions and step enabling conditions are located in the sequence block SBx. This is the
heart of this sequential control system and you must create it yourself. At each transition, the "execute" SB is called to execute the
modes. You must simply load the execute block in the PLC.
The DBx is the user data block for SBx. It is not programmed but
is generated with the PG function DB-GEM and you must load
this in the PLC.
The FB and the corresponding SB are available as standard blocks
(standard blocks are specific to the CPU).
You yourself must create a PB with the appropriate parameters for
the FB and OB 1which triggers the parameter assignment.
For more detailed information about diagnosis, refer to Chapter 6.

Sequential Control and GRAPH 5

: Data traffic
: Block calls
: Generated by LAD 1 CSF 1 STL PG software (Edit 0 8 1 PB)
: Standard biock
: Generated by user with GRAPH 5 PG software (Edit SB)
: Generated by GRAPH 5 PG software (DB-GEN)
: Control main sequence (fast version)
: Execute biock
: User biock (transitions and actions)
: Working DB (DB<G5:sequence>)

Example With and Without Using GRAPH 5

2.6

Example With and Without Using GRAPH 5

Programming
without GRAPH 5
Old representation (DIN standard 40719)

-11.7

STL program for sequencer

Segment l

1
F
F
F

1.7
16.0
16.1
16.0

:A

., --

16.1
1.7

:S
:A
:A

Q
1
F

1.3
1.6
16.1

:
:
:
:

A
A
S
R

.m

Segment 2

Segment 5

:A

It was previously not possible to program sequencers graphically.

According to the DIN standard, the design had to be translated
into an STL program.

Sequential Control and GRAPH 5

Programming with
GRAPH 5
SB 16

TTl

Step 1:

Step 2:

t
t
t

Transition 1:

: A 1 1.7
: BE

Transition 2:

: A 1 1.6
: BE

Transition 3:

: A 1 1.5
: BE

Transition 4:

: A 1 1.4
: BE

Transition 5:

: A N 1 1.7
:AN11.6
:AN11.5
:AN11.4
: BE

: A F233.0
:=Q1.7
: S Q 1.3
: BE

T2
Step 3:

: A F233.0
:=Q1.6
: BE
TM:
TW: KT 50.1

T3
Step 4:

: A F233.0
: = Q1.5
: BE
TM:
TW: KT 50.1

T4

Step 5:

: A F233.0
:=Q1.4
: RQ1.3
: BE

T5

SO GRAPH5 END
Itallcs:

Set by system, you do not need

to make an entry

The sequencer is programmed graphically at the overview level.

The zoom-in programming can be performed in LAD, CSF or
STL. The entire sequencer is located in one SB. The structure is
clearly established in the overview. You only need to program the
actions and step enabling conditions, the program code for the sequencer (switching mechanism) is generated automatically by
GRAPH 5.

Example With and Without Using GRAPH 5

Advantages of programming with GRAPH 5

With GRAPH 5, you can program sequencers both easily and
clearly. Compared with the conventional methods of programming
sequencers, GRAPH 5 makes your job much simpler.

Without GRAPH 5

With GRAPH 5

A sequence block had to be

programmed for every step.

One sequence block contains the

whole sequencer.

Manual conversion of the

sequencer into LAD, CSF, STL.

Programming in GRAPH 5.
Conversion is automatic.

The sequencer structure had to be

established by the program. SBs
required special handling for
branches, junctions and jumps.
You had to make sure that the
correct step was called.

The overview representation

contains all the information about
the structure. The sequence is
fixed and is automatically
converted to program code.

You had to start and scan

monitoring and waiting times,

You can specify a waiting andlor

monitoring time for each step. The
times are started and evaluated
automatically.

Greater time and effort required

to make changes.

Less time and effort required to

make changes with the support of
an editor.

Process sequence difficult to

recognize without graphic
support.

Process sequence easy to

recognize within the graphic
structure.
Representation possible complying
with IEC standard DIS 1131-3.

GRAPH 5 Overview

GRAPH 5 Overview

3.1

Product Overview: the Components of GRAPH 5

The GRAPH 5 system allows user-friendly handling of sequential
control systems. The components of the system are as follows:
The PG software package GRAPH 5 for creating and
modifying sequencers
The PG software package GRAPH 5 diagnosis for diagnosing
and running sequencers
Standard blocks, similar to an operating system for controlling
sequencers

PG Components: The Packages

3.2

PG Components: The Packages

3.2.1
GRAPH 5 Editing
Package

Using this package you can create and work with sequencers. The
three essential functions are as follows:
creating and modifying a sequencer
generating the appropriate data areas
creating the program framework
(calling the sequencer or the standard blocks)
(Refer to Chapter 4)

3.2.2
GRAPH 5
Diagnosis:
Monitoring and
Operating
Sequencers

Using this package, user-friendly diagnostic functions are

available for your sequencers. No modifications can be made with
this package.

(Refer to Chapter 6)

GRAPH 5 Overview

3.3

PLC Components: The Function Blocks

There are different blocks available for the various programmable
logic controllers. Not all functions are possible on all PLCs. The
same block numbers, however, represent the same range of
functions.

Overview of the
standard blocks
FB 70/SB 0

Sequence control (standard version)

FB 71

Sub-sequence control (only with standard

version)

FB 72/SB 2

Sequence control (fast version)

FB 73/SB 3

Sequence control (fast version, only linear)

FB 74

Mode expansion (only for FB 72/FB 73)

FB 75

Timer handling

FB 67,68,69

Diagnosis

SB 5

Synchronization

Creating Sequencers

Creating Sequencers

4.1

Introduction
This chapter contains a complete description of how to create
sequencers both on the PG and the PLC. After working through
this chapter, you will be able to create, call, run and test
sequencers. The chapter is deliberately restricted to the basic
functions. Process synchronization and diagnosis are not
described. You can find detailed information about these functions
in Chapters 5 and 6.

Call Diagrams

4.2

Call Diagrams

4.2.1

Call Diagram
Using FB 70

: Data exchange
: Block calls
: Generated by LAD 1 CSF 1 STL PG software (edit 0 8 1 PB)
: Standard biock
: Generated by user with GRAPH 5 PG software (edit SB)
: Generated by GRAPH 5 PG software (DB-GEN)
: Control main sequence (standard version)
: Timer handling (optional)
: Execute biock (control of mode)
: User biock, (transitions and actions), X >= 10
: Working DB (DB<G5:sequence>)

Creating Sequencers

4.2.2
Call Diagram
Using FB 72

: Data exchange
: Block calls
: Generated by LAD / CSF / STL PG software (edit 0 8 1 PB)
: Standard biock
: Generated by user with GRAPH 5 PG software (edit SB)
: Generated by GRAPH 5 PG software (DB-GEN)
: Control main sequence (fast version)
: Additional modes (only for FB 721 FB 73)
: Timer handling (optional)
: Execute block
: User biock, (transitions and actions), X >= 10
: Working DB (DB <sequence>)

Call Diagrams
4.2.3

Call Diagram
Using FB 73

.
m

: Data exchange
: Block calls

: Generated by LAD / CSF / STL PG software (Edit OB / PB)

: Standard block
: Generated by user with GRAPH5 PG software (Edit SB)
: Generated by GRAPH5 PG software (DB-GEN)

FB 73

: Control main sequence (fast version)

SBX

: Execute block
: User block, (transitions and actions), X >= 10

DB X

: Working DB (DB<GB:sequence>)

SB 3

Creating Sequencers
4.2.4

Call Diagram
Using FB 70171

.
m

: Data exchange
: Block calls
: Generated by LAD 1 CSF 1 STL PG software (Edit 0 8 1 PB)
: Standard biock
R : Generated by GRAPH5 PG software (Edit SB)
: Genrerated by GRAPH5 PG software (DB-GEN)
FB 70

: Control main sequence (standard version)

FB 71

: Control subsequence (standard version)

FB 75

: Timer handling (optional)

: Execute biock
: User block, (transitions and actions), X >= 10
: Working DB (DB<G5:sequence>)

SB 0
SBx, U
DB X,

Creating Functional Sequencers

4.3

Creating Functional Sequencers

4.3.1

General
Main sequence

You specify the sequential structure and the commands of your

program in a main sequence by programming an SB with
GRAPH 5. Information about the individual elements of a
structure can be found in Section 2.4.

Sub-sequence

If the number of steps and transitions in the main sequence is not

adequate for your purposes, you can separate your program using
sub-sequences.
A sub-sequence can be understood as inserting steps in a single
step. This can only be called once per main sequence (refer also to
Section 4.3.6 "Restrictions when Creating Sub-Sequences").
The multistep zoom-in (MSZ) is not assigned directly to any step
in the sequencer. Here, you can program multistep actions and can
assign a number of steps to each segment for which these actions
are valid. Moreover, positive synchronization conditions and
supplementary conditions can be assigned to this MSZ.

Creating Sequencers

Step types

To be able to match your program to your requirements, there are

various step types available, as follows:

Permanent step

The programmed actions are executed

dependent on the RLO. All steps of the
sequencer are run through cyclically, i.e. a
step is also run through when it is not
active. The operations to be executed in a
permanent step are controlled by the RLO.
The RLO is set by the first command of a
step programmed in GRAPH 5
"A F 233.0". Commands independent of the
RLO are always executed, RLO-dependent
commands only when the RLO = 1.

Selective step

The action part of a selective step is only

processed when the step is active. If the
step is not active, the action part is skipped.

Initial step

This becomes active as the first step when a

sequencer starts without the conditions
being scanned. This is also the case
following a jump to SO during cyclic
sequencer processing.

Creating Functional Sequencers

Timer functions

There are, of course, various timer functions available:

Waiting time (TW) TW is the minimum time a step remains

enabled even if the follow-on transition is
already satisfied before this time elapses.
The follow-on step becomes active at the
earliest when the waiting time TW has
elapsed.
Monitoring time

(Tw

(TM-MIN)

Maximum monitoring time

The step enable conditions for the next step
must be satisfied within the preset
monitoring time (TM). If the follow-on step
does not become active within TM, a
timeout message is displayed. As an
alternative, you can use TW as TM-MIN.
Minimum monitoring time
With the appropriate FB parameter
assignment (refer to Section 4.9.3.1) you
can have T W interpreted as a minimum
monitoring time TM-MIN. In this case, the
program checks whether the step enabling
conditions are met before the time elapses.
If this is the case, you receive an error
message.

TW and TM can have different values in each step. Programming

simply involves entering the timer values. The timer functions do
not need to be scanned in the next transition, but are evaluated
automatically by the standard function blocks for the modes.

Creating Sequencers

Integrated tools

You create and edit your program with GRAPH 5. You are,
however, supported by tools when using your program (SB).
If you trigger the function DB-GEN the diagnosis DB,
DB<GS:DIAG> and the working DB, DB<GS:sequence> are
generated.
If problems occur when you run your program, you are supported
by the process synchronization when you restart the SB in the
online mode (refer to Section 5.3 where you will find the
additional settings that must be made).
If you have problems starting up your sequential control system or
timeouts occur when sequencers are running, the online diagnosis
system GRAPH 5 diagnosis will support you in troubleshooting.
Using GRAPH 5 diagnosis, you can monitor up to four PLCs
simultaneously.

Further tools

The standard STEP 5 tools (such as cross reference list,

documentation, rewiring ...) are also available under GRAPH 5.
(Refer also to the STEP 5 Manual.)

Adapting the
timers

The timers required by GRAPH 5 to run an SB are assigned using

the ID screen form (refer to Section 4.5.4).

Important
If you run more than one SB simultaneously, you must make
sure that the timers do not overlap.

Creating Functional Sequencers

GRAPH 5 programs can range from simple to extremely complex.
When you work with GRAPH 5 for the first time, you should start
with the fast version, since fewer parameters must be taken into
account.
The following sections explain the minimum configuration and
ways in which this can be expanded.

Minimum
configuration

A minimum configuration would be a standard FB with the

corresponding sequence block, i.e. FB 70lSB 0, FB 72lSB 2
3,
by a user SB generated with
or F B - 7 3 1 ~ ~sipplemented
GRAPH 5 and the corresponding DB, DB<GS:sequence>
generated with DBGEN.
You must also create a block containing the sequencer call.

Possible
expansions

The minimum configuration outlined above can be extended

essentially using the following components:

FBs to extend performance

dependent on the standard FB:
FB 70
FB 72,73
FB 70, 72, 73

FB 71 sub-sequence, refer to Section 4.3.6

and 4.7
FB 74 additional modes; refer to
Section 4.9.1.5
FB 75 timer handling; refer to
Section 4.9.3.2

Diagnostic functions
FB 67, FB 68 and FB 69, and the required DBs:
DB<GS:DIAG>
DB<DIAG>
DB<GS:PARA>

Process synchronization
SB 5 and SB<Sync>

Creating Sequencers
4.3.2

Entering a
Sequencer (SBx)

You enter the sequencer using the screen forms described in

Section 4.5.
You first select the sequential structure of the sequencer at the
overview level. To do this, you describe the structure of the steps
and corresponding transitions, particularly branches and junctions
within the sequencer. The sequencer is completed with a jump to a
previous step. If you want the processing of the sequencer to be
continued with one or more INIT steps, you must jump to SO.
Following this, you can program the steps and transitions. To do
this, you first select the step or transition and then change to the
zoom-in level. In the steps, you program the output commands
and the required interlocks. The call and supply of parameters for
the sub-sequences (FB 71, with the standard version) is made in
the corresponding steps. In the transitions (between the steps) you
enter the step enabling conditions for the sequencer. Any steps and
transitions you have not yet programmed are displayed at the
overview level with a question mark.
The number of the corresponding data file (DBeG5: sequence>)
for the sequencer is displayed in the ID screen form. This screen
form also displays the number of the first timer for the sequencer
(timer base). The sequencer then automatically occupies two
timers for each simultaneous branch of the sequencer, i.e. with a
maximum of 8 branches, 16 consecutive timers are required in the
PLC.
These timers must be available exclusively for the GRAPH 5
system for this SB and must not be used for other purposes. When
you select the FB, you must stipulate the standard FB to be used.
After programming all the steps, transitions and the ID screen
form, SB X is saved and the processing completed.

Creating Functional Sequencers

4.3.3

Generating the
Required Data
Blocks

Using the function DB-GEN on the PG, you must generate a

special data block DB X for every SB X generated with GRAPH 5
(X is assigned automatically and is the same for the SB and DB).
You must also generate a data block DB y common to all
sequence blocks (y can be freely selected) for diagnostic purposes
which is, however, only required for GRAPH 5 diagnosis (with
FB 67-69). The data blocks must be regenerated not only after
you create the sequencer (SB X) but also following certain
modifications to the sequencer. The conditions for calling
DB-GEN can be found in the following table.

Oniinel PLC in STOP

change in
PLC (output SB)

in *.S5D

change

DB-GEN

aiiowed

required

Oniinel PLC in RUN

change in
PLC (output SB)

DB-GEN

aiiowed

DB-GEN

aiiowed

required

required

Oniinel PLC in RUN

change in
PLC (status SB)

DB-GEN

aiiowed

required

Yes

I no

yes

1 no

yes

I no

Yes

no

yes

1 no

yes

1 no

yes

no

yes

--

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

..

..

selective/ permanent

yes

no

yes

I no

yes

I no

no

--

Comment

yes

I no

yes

yes

I no

no

--

yes

yes

yes

yes

no

--

yes

1 yes

Yes

Yes

no

--

yes

yes

yes

yes

no

zoom-in
TWlTM
time value
TWlTM
Timer base in ID form

inciudelciear
simultaneous branches

INIT steps
Generate ldelete
an MSZ

yes

no

--

~
1

Creating Sequencers
4.3.4

FB Selection /
SB Assignment

The standard FBs available differ from each other in terms of their
range of functions, speed and size and the possible additional
function blocks. For more detailed information refer to Section 4.9.
With GRAPH-5 diagnosis (refer to Chapter 6) you also require
the DB<GS:DIAG>, DB<DIAG> and DB<GS:PARA>.
Remember that FB 69 creates a further temporary DB in the PLC
and the DB number (DB<GS:DIAG> +l) must be reserved for
this.

Synchronization (refer to Chapter 5)

Here, GRAPH 5 automatically generates a synchronization SB for
each SB<GS:sequence>. You can stipulate the number of this SB
in the ID screen form. The default is the number
SB<G5:sequence>+100. You must also load SB 5 supplied as a
standard block in the PLC.

Fast version:
Sequencer with alternative branches

Creating Functional Sequencers

Fast version:
Sequencer with simultaneous and alternative branches
Function block

Corresponding SB

Description

FB 72

SB 2

sequence control

FB 74

mode expansion (only in conjunction

with FB 72 or FB 73), optional

FB 75

timer handling, optional

FB 67, 68, 69

diagnosis, optional
SB5

1 synchronization, optional

Standard version:
Sequencer with simultaneous and alternative branches and
sub-sequence; all modes integrated

Creating Sequencers
4.3.5

Programming the
OB, Assigning
Parameters for the
FB

To allow an SB to be processed, the corresponding standard FB

must be assigned and integrated in the (cyclic) program execution
(OB 1).
The FB assignment should preferably be made in a PBxx with the
same number as the SB to be integrated. To do this, the following
code should be entered in OB 1:
: JU PBxx

For a detailed description of the data for assigning the selected

standard FB, refer to Section 4.9.

To implement the cold restart function for the sequencer, you must
reset the parameter N-ST in a start-up OB of the PLC (OB 20, 21
or 22, depending on the PLC used; refer to Section 4.9.2.6).
For N-ST, you must use a flag bit that is not used at any other
point. The reason for this is that RLO = 0 for N-ST resets the
sequencer. FB 70 reads and writes to N-ST.

Creating Functional Sequencers

4.3.6
Restrictions when
Creating
Sub-Sequences

FB 70 must be used. The sub-sequence SB n can then be created

using the GRAPH 5 program in the same way as a main sequence.
A sub-sequence can be started in any step of a main sequence.
The sub-sequence should be understood as the insertion of steps
within a step of the main sequence and is used to extend the
available capacity. A sub-sequence must be stored as a separate
sequence block. It can only be called once per main sequence and
must not be nested any further. The sub-sequence is controlled by
FB 71 which is called unconditionally in the step of the main
sequence and assigned parameters. You can mark the main
sequence step with a sub-sequence ID.
SB 0 (of the main sequence) is also used as the standard sequence
block and is therefore already available. The sub-sequence can
only run in conjunction with a main sequence (refer also to
Section 4.7).

4.3.7
Operation with
Several SBs

To control a process, you can use several sequencers

simultaneously in the PLC. You must only call each sequencer
once. Make sure that the timers do not overlap. Each sequencer
requires its own FB parameter assignment section.
The standard FBsISBs are, however, only required once.

Creating Sequencers
4.3.8

Further
Restrictions / Limit
Values

Sequence block SB X

Number of the block is selectable between 10 and 255

Steps, transitions, MSZ

The maximum total number of steps and MSZs is 127,

with a maximum of 26 MSZs.
The maximum size of an SB is 4096 words.

MSZ

* The length displayed at the top right must not exceed

180

* The length displayed at the top right plus the number of

233.0 flags times the number of assignments plus 1
must be less than 256.
Step zoom-in

* Length for a permanent step max. 180 commands,

displayed on the screen at the top right.

* Length of selective step max. 127 commands,

displayed on the screen at the top right.
Transition zoom-in

The maximum length depends on the sequence structure;

between 64 and 127 commands.

Simultaneous or parallel
branches

A maximum of 8 simultaneous or parallel branches; in

total max. 31 branches andlor junctions; max. 8 initial
steps can be defined; step numbers from 1to 127.

Flag area

Flags F 200.0 to 255.7 must not be used (except for

expressly permitted and described flags, manual flag:
205.6, step flag: 233.0).

* Length according to screen display.

Loading and Starting the Sequencer

4.4

Loading and Starting the Sequencer

You must perform the following to process the sequencer in the
PLC:
Load the corresponding FB, SB and DB in the PLC depending
on the selected standard FB and the additional functions. The
assignment is described in Section 4.3.3 or 4.3.4.
You must perform the following to start the sequencer:
Transfer the start-up and parameter assignment O B P B to the
PLC (refer to Section 4.3.5).

Creating Sequencers

Creating Sequencers on the PG

4.5

Creating Sequencers on the PG

4.5.1
Structure of the
User Interface

4.5.1.l
ID Screen Form

In GRAPH 5, you work using the following user interfaces:

When you create a new SB, the ID screen form is displayed first.
In this screen form, you enter the configuration parameters and the
identification.
(Refer to Section 4.5.4.)
When you press the enter key, you change to the overview level.

4.5.1.2
Overview Level

Here, the SBs are displayed in structured elements.

(Refer to Section 4.5.5.)
If you press SHIFT F5 Zoom-in, the detailed or zoom-in level is
displayed.

4.5.1.3
Zoom-in Level

4.5.1.4
Editing Mode /
Output Mode

Here, you program the contents of transitions and steps.

(Refer to Section 4.5.6.)

At the overview level and at the zoom-in level you must

distinguish between the editing mode and the output mode. In the
output mode, you can display already existing data. In the editing
mode, you can modify existing data or enter new data.
The following functions are available in the screen forms of both
these levels:

Creating Sequencers
4.5.2

Functions and
Keys available in
GRAPH 5

Display modes
Half screen

i
l
PAUSE

At the overview level: you switch over between "half" and "full
screen". The left half of the screen displays the sequencer and the
right half the comments (refer to Section 4.5.2.1).
At the zoom-in level with STL representation and symbols
selected: changes the display between operands and statement
comments for the step or transition.

Scrolling
Arrow key left

Arrow key right

At the overview level: with half screen display move the screen
contents to the right or left.
At the zoom-in level: position the cursor.

Creating Sequencers on the PG

Zoom-in function
Zoom-in function
special function in GRAPH 5

At the zoom-in level of a step

- (in
. the output mode and with
synchronization selected):
you are in the selection menu for synchronization zoom-ins

Comment
Comment key

Overview-zoom-in level:

1 X COM :comment for stepsJtransitions

segment title
2 X COM :segment comment

Correction
Edit mode

:,,I

At the overview level:

During output, change to the editing mode
At the zoom-in level:
Change to the editing mode

Creating Sequencers

Delete

Iq

Delete characters

At the overview level: delete stepltransition, branch or jump.

At the zoom-in level: delete operand
4.5.2.1

Display Mode

At the overview level

At this level, you can use the half screen key to switch over
between the comment output options halflfull screen. The
sequencer is displayed in the left half of the screen and the
comment in the right half.
The comment of the sequencer element marked by the cursor
appears in the lower comment line.
In the "half screen" representation (4 parallel sequences), a
maximum of four sequencer columns is displayed. The right-hand
half of the screen is used to list the comments of the first three
columns (sequences) on the left of the screen.
By moving the left-hand screen contents to the left or right, you
can display the other sequences and comments.
To display the comments of the 4th column, you must position the
cursor in this column and then move it again towards the right.

Ready to start? Setting COMMENTS: YES

A sequence block is displayed at the overview
level.
Keystrokes

Press the half screen key.

Each time you press this key, the display
changes from "half" to "full screen" and
vice-versa.

Creating Sequencers on the PG

At the zoom-in level

In the output or editing mode of STL, you can switch over
between the display of operand and statement comments by
pressing the half screen key.

Ready to start? Setting

REPRESENT:
COMMENTS:
SYMBOLS:

STL

Display of a step or transition at the zoom-in

level.

Keystrokes

Press the half screen key.

The display changes from operand comments
to statement comments and vice-versa.

Scrolling
If there are more than three parallel sequences and you are using
the "half screen" mode, only three leftmost sequences along with
their step and transition comments can be displayed. Using the
double arrow keys rightpeft, you can move the display on the
left-hand side of the screen horizontally. The comments on the
right are then updated to match the display on the left.

Ready to start? Setting COMMENTS: YES

A sequence block is displayed at the overview
level.
Half screen display.
Keystrokes

To move the left half of the screen to the right

or left:
Press the double a m w key righttleft

Creating Sequencers
4.5.2.2

The Zoom-in
Function

The contents of transitions and steps are programmed at the

zoom-in level in STEP 5 (LAD, CSF, STL). You position the
cursor on the required step or transition. With SHIIT F5
(zoom-in key), you then display the first segment of the step or
transition. When you switch over to the zoom-in level, the PG is
in the output mode. You must then press F6 (Edit) to change to
the edit mode.

Ready to start? A sequence block is displayed at the overview

level

To change to the zoom-in level

Keystrokes

Press SHIIT F5 (Zoom-in)

To change to the overview level

Keystrokes

Enter the segment with F7 and return to the

overview level, or
Abort segment processing with the F8 and
return to the overview level.

Steps and transitions are programmed at the zoom-in level just as

other blocks in STEP 5. At the zoom-in level, a step or a transition
is like a separate block. It can have segments added and can
contain comments etc.
A ? no longer appears to the left of steps and transitions at the
overview level once their segments are programmed.

At the zoom-in level you can use the keys + (+l) or (-1) or roll
screen upldown to jump to the previous or next stepitransition
without returning to the overview level. When the prompt Change
stepitransition? appears, you can reply with yes or no.

Creating Sequencers on the PG

4.5.2.3

Titles/Comments

At the overview level you can input comments for each step and
each transition. Each comment can be up to 32 characters long.
This comment corresponds to the segment title in a STEP 5 block.
With the zoom-in function, not only comments for a step or
transition can be entered, but also segment comments. In the
statement list, you can also enter statement comments.

Ready to start? Setting COMMENTS: YES

At the overview level
Title for stepltransition (segment title)
Keystrokes

Position the cursor on the step or transition at

the overview level.
Press the COM key.
The cursor is now positioned in the comment
input field.
v p e in the comment.

To enter the comment

Press the return key.
To discard the comment
Press the ESC key.

Comments for stepltransition

Keystrokes

Position the cursor on the step or transition

Press the COM key twice
v p e in the comment and enter it with the
return key
Return to the overview level with F8 or the
enter key.

Creating Sequencers

At the zoom-in level

Title for stepltransition
If you press the COM key or SHIlT F6 once at the zoom-in
level, you jump to the comment screen form. Here, press SHIFT
F6, you can enter a segment title.
The segment title of the first segment of a step or transition is the
same as the title at the overview level.
-

Statement comments

In STL, you can enter statement comments of up to 32 characters

in length.

Keystrokes

Select the segment of the step or transition.

Select the editing mode with CORR or F6
Position the cursor on the statement and then
position the cursor in the field for the statement
comment using the SHIFT double arrow key
right.
Input or modify the statement comment.
Complete the statement comment with the
return key.
Complete editing with the enter key

Titles and statement comments can also be entered in SC

comment blocks.

Creating Sequencers on the PG

Comments for steps and transitions

You can enter a segment comment for each step or transition. If a
step or transition consists of several segments, then only one
segment comment is possible per step or transition. It is advisable
to enter the segment comment only in the first segment.

Ready to start? The cursor is located within the segment. or at

the overview level on a step or transition.
Keystrokes
Press the COM key twice.
v p e in the segment comment and complete the
input with the return key.
To enter the comment and return to the segment or overview level

Keystrokes

Press the enter key.

To discard the comment and return to the
segment
Press the ESC key.

Creating Sequencers
4.5.2.4

Correction

In the output mode, the CORR key switches over to the editing
mode.

At the overview level

When an SB is displayed for editing, the sequencer and the following softkey menu appear:
F

Initial

F Selective F Exchange F

Step

Jump

Search 4

Copy
TM-TW

F Zoom-in F
5

Open

Seg com F Extras

Close

Enter

Help

Cancel

You can now make changes at the overview level.

At the zoom-in level

At this level, F6 switches over to the editing mode.
Depending on the selected method of representation, LAD or CSF,
a modified softkey menu appears.

LAD
F

Math

it

Blocks

it

Shift

-l

F Compare F

-(

)-

Seg com F Extras

Help

Enter

Cancel

F Compare F Seg com F

Extras

Help

5 Binary op 6 Compl seg7

Enter

Cancel

5 Binary op 6 Compl seg 7

CSF
F

Math

Blocks

Shift

&

>=l

-1

-4

You can now make changes in the segment.

No softkey menu appears in the STL method of representation.

Creating Sequencers on the PG

4.5.2.5

Deleting

You can use the delete key in the editing mode both at the overview and at the zoom-in level.

At the overview level

Delete stepltransition, branch or jump
Depending on the cursor position, you can delete a stepltransition
pair or a transitionlstep pair. If you position the cursor on the ends
of branches, these are deleted. Jumps can be deleted in the same
way.
Keystrokes

Position the cursor on the step or transition.

Press the delete key.

At the zoom-in level:

LADICSF
Delete at the cursor position, e.g. LAD:
190

F2330

Q100

0-1
Cursor

Keystrokes

Press the delete key.

Contact 19.0 is deleted.

STL
Delete statements or part of a statement at the cursor position, e.g.
you want to delete the statement A I 9.0.
Position the cursor on the ":",and press the delete key.
: A I 1.1
: A I 1.1
: A I 9.0 > Press the delete key.
: A F 233.0
: A F 233.0
: = Q 10.0
: = Q 10.0
: BE
: BE

Creating Sequencers
4.5.3
Activating the
Package

The main menu of the STEP 5 basic package is displayed.

In the CHANGE menu you can select between various optional
packages. The GRAPH 5/II package contains the following:
GRAPH 5 and
G5-DIAG, the GRAPH 5 diagnosis package.

Keystrokes

4.5.3.1
Preparations

Click on GRAPH 5. The main menu of GRAPH 5 then appears.

In the following diagram, the menu items which differ from those
of STEP 5 are shown on a gray background. The explanations of
the main menu for GRAPH 5 diagnosis can be found in Chapter 6.

Presets

Separate from basic package

Note
Presets from the basic package remain unchanged. If you have
not yet selected your presets in the basic package this must be
done now.
Presets are selected in GRAPH 5 in the same way as in the
basic package.

Creating Sequencers on the PG

4.5.3.2

Main Menu of
GRAPH 5

Object

Editor

DB screen forms >

Assignment list >

in the program file

in the PLC ...
Search
in the program file
in the PLC ...

Test

11 I

...F1

Management

Documentation

Change

Generate XRF
EPROM >
Rewire >
Assignment lists
Select drive

STEP 5
GB-DIAG
further ...

DB-GEN in the PLC

RL-GEN in the program file
RL-GEN in the PLC

lnfo GRAPH 5 version

Version of S5 packages

...

Enhanced output >

Block status ...

Status variable
PLC control >
Force variables
Force outputs
Output PLC info >
Program test ON ...
Program test OFF ...

Help

Program structure >

GRAPH 5 blocks >

it

v
DB screen forms >
Assignment list ...
XRF list >
I / Q / F list >
Three-in-one >

The following table indicates the additional functions and

differences compared with the STEP 5 user interface.
Menu

Effect

Editor

/GRAPH 5 block/

Editor

/GRAPH 5 block/Search /in the program file

Test

/Block status

in the program file

Output GRAPH 5 blocks

/ in the PLC...
in the PLC

Output GRAPH 5 block:

stepitransition with search key
Status display of GRAPH 5

Management IDB-GEN in the program file

Create the diagnosis DB and

Management IDB-GEN in the PLC

working DB

Management IRL-GEN in the program file

Create the RL file for a

Management IRL-GEN in the PLC

GRAPH 5 sequencer

Documentation

/Standard output /GRAPH 5 blocks

Output GRAPH 5 blocks on

Creating Sequencers on the PG

4.5.3.3
Creating Blocks

In the GRAPH 5 package, select the submenu GRAPH 5 blocks in

the program file.
The following screen form appears:
Edit GRAPH 5 block@)

Program file :

C:NONAMEST:S5D

1
Block list :
Search key :

Selection

[ SB11
[

Confirm before overwriting

Keystrokes

UpdateXRF

v p e in the new sequence block number (SB X).

The sequence block number must be greater
than or equal to 10.
Confirm with the return key.
This then activates the GRAPH 5 editor and
you can edit an SB.

Creating Sequencers
4.5.4

If there is not yet an SB with the selected number, the ID screen

form is first displayed. If an SB with this number does already
exist, refer to Section 4.5.5.2.
The data block number corresponds to the sequence block number; this 1:l assignment cannot be altered. You can use sequence
blocks from SB 10 onwards. Flags, timers and counters used by
GRAPH 5 are displayed in the ID screen form.
The flag area is not available within the sequencer, outside the sequencer it can be used as a scratchpad area.

Programming the
ID Screen Form

LEN =

D:NONAMEST.S5D
S e q

FB sei

1
1
l
I

c o n t r o i

e n t i a i

SB 10

Data biock occupied

DB l 0

Process synchronization

: No

Synchronization biock no.

: SB 110
T1

sequencer identification

FB 70171 for iinearisimuit. sequence : standard vers.

Sequence biock no.

Timer base

Timer area occupied

T1

Flag area occupied

F 200.0

Timer, counter occ.

T 0 , C O

Time base 2

Lib no

Select FB 4

Syncsei

Sync no

T2

- F 255.7

Enter

Cancel

,
F1: Edit time base
F2: Edit library number
F3: Select between FB 70171 or FB 72 or FB 73 or
FB 78 for controlling the sequencer
F4: Selectldeselect process synchronization
F5: Edit the number of the synchronization SB
F7: Enter the screen form
FB 78 belongs to the GRAPH 5-EDDI package.
FB 78 and process synchronization cannot be selected simultaneously.
For more details on FB 78 please refer to the GRAPH 5-EDDI manual.

Creating Sequencers on the PG

Time base

If you press F1 (Time base) you can enter the time base (T 1
through T 254). The time base specifies the start of the area used
for waiting and monitoring times. The timer T 0 is used by
GRAPH 5. Rvo timers are required per simultaneous branch
(max. 2 X 8 = 16), i.e. if a simultaneous branch is programmed,
T 1to T 252 can be used as the start address of the time base. If 8
simultaneous branches are programmed, T 1to T 238 are possible
as the start address.
These timers are occupied even if no times are entered in the
branch; they must not be used outside GRAPH 5. The timers
permitted depend on the particular PLC. They must not overlap
for different sequence blocks loaded in the PLC.

Lib no

If you press F2 (Lib no.) you can enter a 1to 5 digit library
number. The library number can only be input or modified in the
sequencer identification screen form. When you output (display)
an SB, the F2 (Lib no) key displayed in the softkey menu has no
effect in GRAPH 5.

Select FB

If you press F3 (SELECT FB), you select the standard FBs you
want to use.
The following function blocks are available:
FB 70171 for linear/altemative/simultaneous/sub-sequence:
standard version
- FB 72
for linearlaltemative and simultaneous sequence:
fast version
- FB 73
for linear and alternative sequence: fast version
for GRAPH 5-EDDI; This function is described in
- FB 78
the GRAPH 5-EDDI manual.
-

The selected FB and the corresponding "execute" SB (SB 0 for

FB 70171, SB 2 for FB 72, SB 3 for FB 73) must be available in
the programmable controller. If FB 73 (for linear sequences) is
selected, then no simultaneous branch can be entered in the
sequencer.

Creating Sequencers

Sync sel

Only for linear sequences (including alternative branches).

For further information about process synchronization, refer to
Chapter 5.

Sync no

Here, you enter a sequence block number.

The number must be > 10.
The default is: sequence number plus 100, maximum however 255.

Note
When you exit the ID screen form by pressing the ESC key
when first creating a sequence block, you can continue to work
with the selected block in LAD, CSF or STL.
If you press the enter key, the overview level is displayed.

Creating Sequencers on the PG

4.5.5
Programming at
the Overview Level
4.5.5.1
Start of the
Sequencer

After you have entered the data in the ID screen form (refer to
Section 4.5.4) by pressing F7 (Enter) or the enter key, the start of
a sequencer is displayed on the screen.
You are in the editing mode at the overview level
You can expand the sequencer using the cursor and function keys.

Cur, message

initial

Selective

Step

Jump

F Exchange F
3

Search

Copy

Zoom-in

TM-W

Open

F Seg corn
6

Close

Extras

Help

Enter

Cancel

,
The question marks in the display mean that the step (transition)
has not yet been programmed at the zoom-in level.

Creating Sequencers
4.5.5.2

Changing the SB

If you call an existing FB in the block list (refer to

Section 4.5.3.3), the following screen form appears:

C : [email protected]

SB 10

Lib no. 123

LEN =

Current message

ID screen 2

Search

Half scr

TM-W

Zoom-in

Seg com

Save

Help

Edit

Enter

Cancel

You are in the output mode at the overview level. You can change
to the editing mode by pressing F6.

Creating Sequencers on the PG

Depending on the cursor position, you can expand the sequencer

by one stepltransition pair or transitionlstep pair (max. 127 steps
or transitions). A transition always follows a step.
A step or jump to a step always follows a transition.
To add a stepltransition to the end of a sequence or branch

Keystrokes

Position the cursor at the end of the sequence

or branch
Press F1 (Step).

Example

-Cursor

on end of sequence F1

Creating Sequencers

To insert a stepltransition

Keystrokes

Position cursor on step.

Press F1 (Step).

Example

Buffer limit

If you want to make use of the maximum number of

stepsltransitions (127) and then want to delete or reposition
individual steps in the sequencer, the PG displays the following
message:
memory or internal buffer full.
Reason: the deleted steps are only taken into account when you
store the modified sequencer. You must first store the sequencer
(with F7) and then output it again before you can enter the
remaining steps.

Creating Sequencers on the PG

To insert a transitionlstep

Keystrokes

Position cursor on transition.

Press F1 (Step).

Example

Numbering

The steps and transitions are numbered by the GRAPH 5 software

when they are stored. The numbering is consecutive from top to
bottom. If there are several parallel branches, first the branch on
the extreme left will be numbered through from top to bottom,
then the second from left branch once again from top to bottom.

Creating Sequencers

4.5.5.4
Simultaneous
Branch

To open a simultaneous branch, the cursor must be positioned on

a step.
To open a simultaneous branch

Keystrokes

Position cursor on step.

Press F5 (Open).

Example

A simultaneous branch can only be opened with the settings

FB 70171 and FB 72. With the setting FB 73 (linear sequence) the
following error message is displayed: Action not permitted at this
point.

Number of
branches,
messages

You can program a maximum of 8 simultaneous or parallel

branches with 31 branches andlor junctions. If this value is
exceeded, the PG displays the following messages:
- more than 8 simultaneous or parallel branches: Structure
limits exceeded or
- more than 31 branches andlor junctions: Memory or internal
buffer full.

Creating Sequencers on the PG

Closing a simultaneous branch

An open simultaneous branch always ends with a step and must

therefore be connected to a transition. You can either specify the
target transition directly using the cursor or indirectly by typing in
the target transition number.

Keystrokes

Position cursor on the end of the branch.

Press F6 (Close).
a) directly:
Position cursor on target transition.
Press F6 (Close) again.
b) indirectly:
Press F6 (Close) again.
Type in the number of the target transition.
Press the return key.
c) with the mouse:
Click on the target transition with the mouse.

Example

-Cursor

on branch end, then

a) F6, Cursor on transition 2,

F6

or
b) F6, F6, type in

Press return key

c) F6,

Click on target transition with the mouse

Creating Sequencers
4.5.5.5

Alternative Branch
Before you open an alternative branch, you must position the
cursor on a transition.
To open an alternative branch

Keystrokes

Position cursor on transition.

Press F5 (Open).

Example

Number of
branches,
messages

You can program a maximum of 8 simultaneous or parallel

branches with 31 branches andlor junctions.
If this value is exceeded, the PG displays the following messages:
- more than 8 simultaneous or parallel branches: Structure
limits exceeded or
- more than 31 branches andlor junctions: Memory or internal
buffer full.

Creating Sequencers on the PG

Closing an alternative branch

An open alternative branch always ends with a transition and must
therefore be connected to a step. You can specify the target step
either directly using the cursor or indirectly by typing in the target
step number.

Keystrokes

Position cursor on the end of the branch.

Press F6 (Close).
a) directly:
Position cursor on target step.
Press F6 (Close) again.
b) indirectly:
Press F6 (Close) again.
v p e in the number of the target step.
Press the return key.
c) with the mouse:
Click on the target step with the mouse.

Example

-Cursor

on branch end then

b) F6, F6 type In

Press return key

c) F6,

Cl~ckon target step w ~ t hthe mouse

You can also close an alternative branch with the jump function.

- 47

Creating Sequencers
4.5.5.6

Jump Commands

A sequence or open alternative branches can be closed by a jump.

The jump can be made to any step in the sequence. Jumps can
also be made to SO (sequence end). You can specify the target
step either directly using the cursor or indirectly by typing in the
target step number.

Keystrokes

Position cursor on the end of the branch or

sequence. Press F2 (Jump).
a) directly:
Position cursor on target step.
Press F2 (Jump) again.
b) indirectly:
Press F2 (Jump) again.
v p e in the number of the target step.
Press the return key.
c) with the mouse:
Click on the target step with the mouse.

Example

Cursor on branch end, then

a) F2, Cursor on step 3,
or
b) F2, F2, Type in

Press return key

Click on target step
c) F2,
with the mouse

F2

Creating Sequencers on the PG

4.5.5.7

End of a Sequence

The sequencer is completed by a jump to any step or to step 0

(SO). When the sequencer is run the INIT steps are processed
again after the end of the sequencer with a jump to SO.
Exception: programming the sub-sequence with the KEND
parameter. The sequencer does not need to be completed with a
jump to SO. Step 0 means that the programming of the sequencer
is terminated at this point. The comment GRAPH 5 END is
automatically displayed.

Creating Sequencers
4.5.5.8

Timers

You can assign a monitoring andlor waiting time to every step

except for initial steps.
Possible input: KT..., IW, QW, FW, PW, OW
@W not permitted!).

Waiting time (TW)

The waiting time (TW) is the minimum time a step remains

enabled even if the follow-on transition is already satisfied before
this time elapses. The follow-on step becomes active at the
earliest when the waiting time TW has elapsed.

Monitoring time
(TM/TM-MIN)

Maximum monitoring time

The step enable conditions for the next step must be satisfied
within the preset monitoring time F M ) . If the follow-on step does
not become active within TM, a timeout message is displayed. As
an alternative, you can you can use TM as follows:

Minimum monitoring time

With the appropriate FB parameter assignment (refer to
Section 4.9.3.1) you can arrange for the TM to be interpreted as a
minimum monitoring time TM-MIN. In this case, a check is made
as to whether the step enabling conditions for the next step are
satisfied before the time elapses. If this is the case, you obtain an
error message.
In every step, TW and TM can have different values. The
programming simply involves entering the timer values
(parameter assignment). The timer function does not need to be
scanned in the next transition, but is automatically evaluated by
the standard function blocks for the modes.

Creating Sequencers on the PG

4.5.5.9
lnit Time

You can enter the initial values for TMDW.

Ready to start? You are in the editing mode at the overview

level.
Keystrokes
Position the cursor on the step to be assigned a
timer.
Using SHIlT F7 (Extra) change to the second
softkey level.
The following screen form then appears:

C : [email protected]

Lib no. 123

initial values:

ID screen 2

TW

TM:

F
1

LEN =

F
inittime

Subseq

New MS2

Help

Del MS2 7

Return

Here, using F2 (Inittime), you can enter the initial values for
TMDW. If you enter values here, these are adopted as default
values if you subsequently insert a step. Subsequent changes are
only possible for specific steps.

Creating Sequencers
4.5.5.10

Sub-Sequence

You can assign the ID 'U' to a step. Using this ID, you can
highlight a step which calls a sub-sequence.

Ready to start? You are in the editing mode at the overview

level.
Keystrokes
Using SHIlT F7 (Extra), change to the second
softkey level.
The same screen as shown on the previous
page is then displayed.
Click on F3 (Subseq) and mark the step or
steps to be assigned an ID.

Creating Sequencers on the PG

4.5.5.11
Initial Step

The "initial" function is used to specify the initial steps. A

maximum of 8 initial steps can be defined. These steps must be
located in different simultaneous branches. You cannot assign
monitoring times (TM) or waiting times (TW) to initial steps.
Changing over between a permanent and initial step
A step becomes an initial step and an initial step becomes a
permanent step as follows:

Keystrokes

Position the cursor on the required step

Press SHIFT F1 (Initial).
Pressing SHIFT F1 (Initial) repeatedly defines
a step alternately as an initial or permanent
step.

An initial step is activated as follows:

when cold starting the sequencer without scanning conditions
after a jump to step SO in a main sequence

4.5.5.12
Permanent Step/
Selective Step

Permanent step
The programmed actions are executed depending on the RLO. All
steps of the sequence are run through cyclically both active and
inactive steps. The operations to be performed in a permanent step
are controlled by the step flag. The step flag is entered by
GRAPH 5 in each step as the first statement: "A F233.0".
With active steps, GRAPH 5 sets the step flag to "l", with
inactive steps to "0". RLO-independent commands are therefore
performed in every cycle, RLO-dependent commands only when
the RLO = 1.

Creating Sequencers

Note
Transitions are always processed selectively.
The step flag is set by the switching transition for the next step
(= 1) and reset for the previous step (= 0). Transitions which do
not enable a step do not change the step flag.

Selective step
A selective step is only processed in the cycle in which the
appropriate step flag is set. Othenvise the selective step is
skipped. In the automatic mode, a maximum of one step per
simultaneous branch can be active.
Only the active step zoom-in is processed.
If a selective step is not active all the statements at the zoom-in
level are skipped and no longer executed.
Changing between a permanent and selective step:

Keystrokes

Position cursor on the appropriate step.

Press SHIFT F2 (Selective).
Pressing SHIFT F2 (Selective) repeatedly
defines a step alternately as a selective or
permanent step.

Creating Sequencers on the PG

4.5.5.13

Search

The way in which the search function operates is explained in the

STEP 5 manual.
You can use the search function in the following situations:
- at the overview level to search for steps or transitions
- to search for step zoom-ins or transition zoom-ins
- to search for operands
- to search for multistep zoom-ins (MSZ) or synchronization
conditions.
Using the search function, you can position the cursor directly on
the element you want to find.

Searching for a step or a transition

Keystrokes

Press F3 (Search).
Enter Sn or TRn.
Press the return key.

During this, the function keys are inactive.

Searching for a step zoom-in or a transition zoom-in.

Keystrokes

Press F3 (Search).
Enter SLn-no. or TRLn-no.
Press the return key.

During this, the function keys are inactive.

Searching for MSZ or synchronization conditions.
SS-no. searches for a synchronization condition of the step with
the specified number
For further information about synchronization conditions, refer to
Chapter 5.

Creating Sequencers

Searching for an operand

If you specify an operand as the search key, you cannot complete
this with the return key but must press one of the function keys
as follows:

F4 (Step 1)
F5 (Trans 1)
or F3 (Continue)

searches from the first step and therefore

within the whole block
searches from the first transition and
therefore within the transitions of a block
searches from the current position

Creating Sequencers on the PG

4.5.5.14
Exchanging
Contents of Steps
or Transitions at
the Zoom-in Level

With this function you can exchange the contents of two steps or
two transitions at the zoom-in level. Comments (segment titles,
segment and statement comments), monitoring and waiting times
( T M W ) and the step characteristics INITIALISELECTIVE (and
assignments in the MSZ) are also exchanged.
First, position the cursor on one of the two steps or transitions.
Then press F3 (EXCHANGE) and the step or transition is marked
(invisibly). After this, specify the second step (target step) or
second transition (target transition)
You can specify the target step or transition either directly using
the cursor or indirectly by typing in the target step or transition
number. You cannot exchange a step with a transition or
vice-versa.

Keystrokes

Press F5 (Edit) or Corr.

Position cursor on step or transition.
Press SHIFT F3 (Exchange).
a) directly:
Position cursor on target step or target
transition.
Press SHIFT F3 (Exchange).
b) indirectly:
Press SHIFT F3 (Exchange).
Type in the number of the target step or target
transition.
Press the return key.
c) with the mouse:
Click on the target step or target transition with
the mouse.

Creating Sequencers
4.5.5.15

Copying the
Contents of a Step
or Transition at
the Zoom-in Level

With this function you can copy the contents of a step or

transition at the zoom-in level.

Comments (segment titles, segment and statement comments),

monitoring and waiting times (TMITW) and the step
characteristics INITIALISELECTIVE (and the assignments in the
MSZ) are copied.
First position the cursor on the step or transition to be copied.
Then press F4 (Copy), the step or transition is marked (invisibly).
Then specify the target step or transition to which you want to
copy the content.
You can specify the target step or transition directly using the
cursor or indirectly by typing in the target step or transition
number. You cannot copy from a step to a transition and
vice-versa.

Keystrokes

Press F5 (Edit) or Corr.

Position cursor on step or transition.
Press SHIFT F4 (Copy).
a) directly:
Position cursor on target step or target
transition.
Press SHIFT F4 (Copy).
b) indirectly:
Press SHIFT F4 (Copy).
v p e in the number of the target step or
transition. Press the return key.
c) with the mouse
Click on the target step or target transition with
the mouse.

Creating Sequencers on the PG

4.5.5.16

Completing Editing

Condition

You are in the editing mode at the overview

level.

You have created a new block

To store the block

Keystrokes

Press the enter key.

GRAPH 5 changes to the output mode
Press the enter key again.
Editing is completed and the block is stored in
the default program file.

To cancel editing without storing the block

Keystrokes

Press the ESC key.

GRAPH 5 changes to the output mode.
Press the ESC key again.
The PG displays the following message if you
have changed the SB: Cancel! Destroy SB in
PG?
Yes: (Cancel)
Press the enter or return key.
Return to the menu.
No: (Continue)
Click on the no field.
The PG remains at the overview level.

Creating Sequencers

You have changed the block.

To store the block

Keystrokes

Press the enter key 2x

Editing is terminated and the PG displays
the following:
SB already in file, overwrite?
If you select "yes", the block is stored in the
default program file.

To cancel editing without storing the block

Keystrokes

Press the ESC key.

The system returns to the old version of the
block and changes to the output mode.

Important

After each structural change to an SB, the working data block

DB-GEN must be regenerated. Structural changes are all
changes at the overview level, i.e.:
- changes in the ID screen form
- inserting or deleting an MSZ
- inserting or deleting steps and transitions
- inserting or deleting simultaneous/alternative branches
- INIT steps

Creating Sequencers on the PG

4.5.6
Zoom-in Level
4.5.6.1
Programming
StepsFransitions

Procedure
At the zoom-in level of a step or transition, statements can be
programmed in LAD, CSF and STL just as in STEP 5. This also
applies to statement comments, segment titles and segment
comments.
At the zoom-in level, you must switch over from the output mode
to the editing mode by pressing F6 (Edit).
If you press the enter key or F6, you return to the output mode.

Special considerations
The RLO valid at :BE may, if necessary, be updated by the
GRAPH 5 software (see above) and then used to enable a further
step. (Refer also to Section 4.3.8 "Further Restrictions".)

Note
You can only enter one segment comment per stepltransition
(first segment in the zoom-in). The commands BEC or BEU
must not be used in zoom-ins. When data blocks are opened,
the working DB, DB<GS:sequence> must be called again
before BE.

Creating Sequencers

4.5.6.2
Flag 233.0 in Steps

All the step flags used in the program are represented by flag
233.0 when output on the PG. The term "F 233.0" disguises real
flags, e.g. F 234.1, F 234.2 etc. This internal assignment is made
by GRAPH 5. The procedure is not visible to the user.
Flag 233.0 is used as a substitute for the enable signal of the
displayed step. It can be scanned at any point and as often as
required within the zoom-in of a step, however, it must not be
changed (assignment, setting, resetting).
Flag 233.0 can be used as an interface between step and MSZ
(refer to Section 4.5.6.5).
In an MSZ, however, the flag 233.0 is restricted as follows:
it can only be scanned once using Boolean operations (A,O),
otherwise no operations are permitted
- it cannot be used as a parameter for an FB (either as
input/output/throughput parameter).
-

This enable signal has the value 1when the corresponding step is
active in automatic operation.
A flag bit is assigned uniquely to each step.
The following diagram illustrates the various representations of
the flag F 233.0.

CSF:

F 233.0

?????????
:BE

Creating Sequencers on the PG

Since the programming/modification of the step flag has a

considerable influence on the process control, changes should
only be made when you are sure of the following:
- the consequences of the change and
- you can test the program before using it without any danger
resulting from unexpected reactions/actions.
4.5.6.3
Flag 233.0 in

Transitions

At the zoom-in level, the transition indicates the user section of

the step enabling conditions. The result of logic operation (RLO)
obtained is not the definitive step enabling condition, and may
still be corrected by GRAPH 5 (waiting time not yet elapsed,
UQIT, T + l signal does not exist for conditional step control etc.).

STL at the zoom-in

level

Only the user part of the step enabling condition is displayed.

LADICSF at the
zoom-in level

LAD and CSF segments must be completed with an assignment

(exception block call). For this reason, a non-existent assignment
in the PLC must be simulated for the display on the screen.

Step enabling
conditions

Using F 233.0 indicates that the resulting signal will be used to

activate the next step(s). This flag bit is generated automatically
by the GRAPH 5 software, no command is issued in the PLC.
This means that there is also no status display for this assignment.
In CSF and LAD, no flags from the area F 200.0 to F 255.7 may
be programmed.

Important
Flag 233.0 must not be programmed anywhere in transitions at
the zoom-in level. If it is required for the graphics, it will be
generated automatically.

Creating Sequencers
4.5.6.4

Segment Functions

Programming segments in steps/transitions

At the zoom-in level of a step or transition, statements can be
programmed in LAD, CSF and STL just as in STEP 5. This also
applies to statement comments, segment titles and segment
comments.
At the zoom-in level, you must switch over from the output mode
to the editing mode by pressing F6 (Edit).
If you press the enter key or F6, you return to the output mode.

Creating Sequencers on the PG

Inserting, appending, deleting segments

You can insert, append or delete segments at the zoom-in level of
a step or transition in LAD, CSF and STL just as in STEP 5.
Select the segment in the output mode at the zoom-in level.
The re-translation list #SBRL is regenerated when the SB is next
output.

Inserting a segment in a step or transition

Ready to start? The PG is in the output mode at the zoom-in
level.
Keystrokes

Select the segment before which you want to

insert the segment.
Press F5 (Seg fct).
Press F5 (Insert).
There are now three ways of inserting a further
segment:
1.Press F1 (New)
to create a new segment
A segment is inserted, the PG is in
the editing mode and the segment can be
programmed as normal.
2. Press F2 (Buffer)
to read in a segment from the buffer
3. F3 (Seg)
Here, you can enter the number of the
segment you want to place at this position.

Creating Sequencers

Appending a segment to a step or transition

Ready to start? The PG is in the OUTPUT mode at the
zoom-in level.
Keystrokes

Select the last segment.

Press F5 (Seg fct).
Press F6 (Append).
There are now three ways of appending a
further segment:
1. Press F1 (New)
to append a segment you will
create.
A segment is appended, the PG is in
the editing mode and the segment can be
entered as usual.
2. Press F2 (Buffer)
to read in a segment from the buffer.
3. F3 (NW)
Here, you can enter the number of the
segment you want to append.

Creating Sequencers on the PG

Deleting a segment in a step or transition

Ready to start? The PG is in the output mode.
Keystrokes

Select the segment to be deleted.

F5 (Seg fct), then
Press Shift F4 (Delete).
The PG prompts: Delete?
Yes:
Press the enter key.
The segment is deleted.
No:
Press the ESC key.
The segment is not deleted.

Note
If you delete the last segment of an MSZ , you also delete the
assignments.
For further information about editing blocks in LAD, CSF or STL
refer to the STEP 5 manual.

Creating Sequencers
4.5.6.5

Multistep
Zoom-Ins (MSZ)

With the GRAPH 5 software prior to version V 6.0, it was

difficult to program the multiple use of actions in steps and to
create the required multiple interlocks.
The new version makes this easier with the multistep zoom-in
(MSZ).
Using this, you can program the actions valid either for all steps
or assigned to selected steps. The MSZ is implemented using step
zoom-ins assigned to some or all the steps at the overview level.
Instead of step numbers, letters are assigned to the MSZ. Possible
MSZ names are as follows: SLA, SLB...SLZ. The MSZ names are
assigned by GRAPH 5 in alphabetical order when the MSZ is
generated.
An MSZ is always run through
after all steps have been processed
- in alphabetical order.
-

At least one step must be assigned to an MSZ; as the maximum

you can assign all steps to an MSZ.
If flag 233.0 is programmed more than once in an MSZ, the status
display no longer functions.

Creatingldeleting an MSZ
Ready to start? You are in the editing mode at the overview
level.
Keystrokes

Using SHIlT F7 (Extra) change to the second

softkey level. The following screen form then
appears:

Creating Sequencers on the PG

-'l
C : [email protected]

SB 10

Lib no. 123

LEN =

S0

S1: ...

ID screen 2

F
inittime

Subseq

New MS2

Help

Del MS2 7

Return

Creating an MSZ
Keystrokes

Press F5 (New MSZ)

Create the new MSZ.

Deleting an MSZ
Keystrokes

Press F6 (Del MSZ)

A line appears in the screen form in which you
can enter the number of the MSZ you want to
delete.

Creating Sequencers

You can also find an MSZ using the "search" function:

Ready to start? Select the overview or stepltransition zoom-in

Keystrokes

Select the editing mode

Press F3 (Search)
v p e in the search key (e.g. SLA)
Press the return key.
The system displays the SLA zoom-in.
- v p e in the assignment to the steps
(S2, S5...)
Below the segment and above the softkey
menu you will see a line in which the numbers
of the steps assigned to this segment are listed.
If you press F4 (Assignmt) you move the
cursor to this line and you can enter the
assigned steps in the form Sx.
- Press the enter key.
- Select the editing mode.
- Program and enter the MSZ step A (B,C...).

Creating Sequencers on the PG

Correcting an MSZ
Ready to start? Select the overview or stepltransition zoom-in
Keystrokes

Press F3 (Search)
v p e in the required step (e.g. SLA), press
the return key
The system displays the zoom-in of SLA.
- Make the corrections or change the
assignment with F4
- Press the enter key to save the changes

Note
The total number of steps and MSZs is restricted to 127, with a
maximum of 26 MSZs.

Application
example

Multistep zoom-ins (MSZs) make the programming of the

following tasks much easier:
Actions common to several steps (e.g. S2 and S5) and which
require the same interlocks.

Procedure

F 233.0

The zoom-ins of S2 and S5 can remain

empty
Programming of SLA with the action

Interlocks

Assignment of SLA to S2 and S5

You only need to program the action at one

place and do not require auxiliary constructions
as previously; i.e. you do not need to access a
global flag.

Creating Sequencers

Actions common to several steps (e.g. S2 and S5) which in

some cases require different interlocks

Procedure

F 233.0

+4

Interlocks step 2

F 233.0

+4

Zoom-ins of S2 and S5 with different

interlocks:

Interlocks step 5

F 233.0

F 233.0

When one of these assigned steps S2 or S5 is active, the

current step enable (F 233.0) for this sub-segment is set.
-

SLA with the action and the same interlock:

program the MSZ as follows and assign S2, S5.
F 233.0

+4

same interlock

Qm. n

Creating Sequencers on the PG

Program sections required constantly in several steps

Centralized creation of commonly required interlocks/program

sections

Procedure

Programming of SLA for a constant

interlock (A...;...; = F xy)
Constant interlock

+1

F 233.0

+4

Programming individual actions in

assigned step zoom-ins with interlock
using F xy
Fx.y

F x.y

Qm.n

Creating Sequencers

Assignment editor
The following functions described for the assignment editor can
only be executed in the MSZ.
Editing steps

Keystrokes

Enter the steps and step numbers %no>.

(Illegal input includes SO and step numbers
higher than 127.)
Confirm your input with the return key. (The
system remains in the assignment editor.)
Enter further steps.
Confirm your entries with the enter key.

The whole assignment is accepted and you exit the assignment

editor.
If you previously selected the assignment ALL STEPS, the flag
F 233.0 is not entered in the segment.

Key functions for the assignment

Creating Sequencers on the PG

4.5.6.6
Empty Steps/
Empty Transitions

StepsJtransitions which have not been programmed are marked in

the structure display with a question mark (?).
Transition:
The input to the zoom-in contains question marks (?????????).
Step:
The output of the zoom-in contains question marks (?????????).

Effect
The running of the sequencer is not effected.
Empty transition:
The following step is enabled without any conditions, i.e. the step
enabling condition is always satisfied.
Empty step:
Since no action takes place in this step, there is no output signal
for a program cycle.
Special features of an empty step:
An output is to remain set in several steps, implemented by
ORing auxiliary flags. If there is an empty step within this
sequence of steps, this output is reset during the empty step, i.e.
during a program cycle.

Creating Sequencers
4.5.7

Creating the Data

Blocks

Each sequencer requires a working DB with a number identical to

that of the sequence block. For diagnosis of the sequencers in the
PLC memory, a diagnosis DB @B<GS:DIAG>) is also required
that is accessed when you call the diagnosis function. The
diagnosis DB is the same for all sequencers in the PLC. These
DBs are generated with the DBGEN function, F5.

Ready to start? You have selected the GRAPH 5 package and

the presets.
Select - DBGEN - PCIFD in the Management
menu and press the enter key.
The DB is generated when you press the enter key. DBs you have
already generated are marked with YES in the DB ALREADY
EXISTS column. If a working DB already exists, the number of
the diagnosis DB is derived from it and entered in the input field.
If the diagnosis DB already exists, the message: DB with
diagnosis DB no. already exists
already exists, overwrite DB?
v p e in the DB no..
Press the enter key.
You can abort the generation by pressing the ESC key

Each existing DB is indicated individually in the message line

following which the program jumps to the next SB-DB pair.
After generating, you have correctly assigned working DB and
diagnosis DB numbers. The version numbers have also been
checked.
The generation of the DB always applies to all S B P B pairs on
the FD or in the PLC. As a check, the assigned timer area is also
output.

Creating Sequencers on the PG

4.5.8

Fast
Re-Translation of
Sequence Blocks

To display long sequence blocks quickly, you can store

re-translation information for the SB in a list, the re-translation list
#SBRL.nnn.
The re-translation list is generated using the function RLGEN in
the management menu and stored in the preset program file.
The re-translation list contains an internal version identifier that is
also entered in the SB. The version identifier is used to ensure the
consistency of the SB and its corresponding re-translation list
#SBRL. Each time an SB is modified, the version number is
incremented.
RLGEN only needs to be triggered when a new SB has been
created. If you modify the SB, the system automatically updates
the corresponding re-translation list #SBRL and overwrites the
old one.
The SB with the new version identifier must be written back to
the source device (FD or PLC).

Outputting an SB with fast re-translation

When an SB is displayed using the PG (OUTPUT, STATUS), the
program checks whether or not a re-translation list #SBRL.nnn
exists. If it does, the information stored in it will be used for a fast
re-translation. Long blocks can be displayed much more quickly
using this list.
If the version identifiers of the SB and #SBRL do not match (e.g.
after modifying the SB without following it with RLGEN), the
re-translation takes place as normal. Following the re-translation,
the re-translation information can be entered in the re-translation
list #SBRL.
The changes to the SB should, however, always be made on hard
disk and the SB should only then be transferred to the PLC.

Creating Sequencers

Deleting the re-translation list

You can delete a re-translation list #SBRL.nnn in the same way as
a DOC file.
(For more detailed information, refer to the STEP 5 manual.)

4.5.9
Cross Reference
Lists with
GRAPH 5

You select the cross reference lists just as for STEP 5 blocks. The
information is divided according to steps and transitions. In the
TIMERS section of the cross reference list, the times of the steps
are shown as assignments in the previous transition.
Some of the information refers to the operation part, this can be
ignored. This includes the following:
-

4.5.1 0
Rewiring GRAPH 5
Blocks

data words of the working DB (refer to Chapter 7)

standard SB call (SB 0 to SB 9)
flag > 200.0 to flag 255.7

Rewiring is described in the STEP 5 manual.

Note
The following must not be rewired:
- flags from F 200.0 onwards and
- the working DBs and diagnosis DBs

4.5.1 1
Printing out a
Sequence Block

Sequence blocks can be printed out as usual in STEP 5.

Call Structure

4.6

Call Structure

Example of an
FB 72/73 call

Starting a sequence SB 11, controlled by FB 72/SB 2

(FB 73/SB 3 analogous), in the automatic mode:

NAME
SBNR
AUS
A/H
TIPP
T+ 1
QIT
STO

: GPH: SIMl

:KF
:F
:F
:F
:F
:F
:Q

+l1
0.0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
1.0

0
ON

F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F

0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.0
0.2
0.3
0.4

UN

timeout bit

(RLO=l)
(permanent signal 1 = automatic mode)

For further information, refer to Chapter 7

Creating Sequencers

Nesting Main and Sub-Sequences

4.7

Nesting Main and Sub-Sequences

Nesting is only possible with the use of FB 70. The sub-sequence
SBn can then be created like a main sequence using the
GRAPH 5 program. A sub-sequence can be started in every step
of a main sequence. The sub-sequence must be understood as
inserting steps within a step of the main sequence and is used to
extend capacity. You must save a sub-sequence as a sequence
block. This can only be called once per main sequence and must
not be further nested. The sub-sequence is controlled by FB 71
which is called and assigned parameters in the step of the main
sequence with an unconditional jump. You can mark the step with
a sub-sequence ID in the main sequence.
The block SB 0 of the main sequence is used as the processing
block and therefore already exists.
The sub-sequence can only be used in conjunction with a main
sequence (standard function block FB 70 and FB 71).

4.7.1

The sub-sequence must be called directly from a step in the

main sequence or from an MSZ. The steps with a
sub-sequence call must be
- either in the linear section or in an alternative branch
- be permanent steps
- be programmed with a waiting time
Each sub-sequence must only be called once.
Each sub-sequence must be stored in its own sequence block.
Sub-sequences must not be nested further.

Further Conditions

Important
You cannot call sub-sequences in selective steps!

4.7.2
Programming

To use a sub-sequence, the following preparations must be made:

preparations in the main sequence
creation of the sub-sequence
generation of the corresponding DB

4.7.2.1
Preparations in
the Main Sequence

In the step of the main sequence you must call (:JUFB 71) and
assign parameters to FB 71 for the sub-sequence, as follows:
1. Enter the number of the sub-sequence.

r
t Number

-- SBNR

The number of the sequence block is transferred.

Nesting Main and Sub-Sequences

2. Enter the start signal of the main sequence.
The sub-sequence must be started extra (parameter=STRT), either
with a separate signal or with the step flag F 233.0 which must be
programmed in the step of the main sequence.
The flag F 233.0 is the step flag from the main sequence (TAKT
enable signal from GRAPH 5).
You cannot use the step flag F 233.0 directly and you must use an
intermediate flag. The step containing the sub-sequence call must
be a permanent step and must be programmed with waiting time

m.

-Fxy
STRT

E X . ~ the
= flag which transfers the value of F 233.0 to the called
sequence block.
The mode for the FB is adopted internally from the main
sequence; explicit parameter assignment is not necessary.

Creating Sequencers

3. Reply signal from the sub-sequence and continuing the main

sequence.
The end of the sub-sequence is defined by a jump to step 0. In
this status, the sub-sequence supplies the signal UEND = 1.This
signal must be scanned in the main sequence in the transition
following the step containing the sub-sequence call.

"sub-sequence
Call"

Main seauence

Function block for

the sub-sequence

Sub-sequence

4. Mark step X of the main sequence with the sub-sequence ID U.

Nesting Main and Sub-Sequences

4.7.2.2
Creating the
Sub-Sequence

4.7.2.3
Generating the
Corresponding DB

4.7.3
Loading in the PLC

Create the sub-sequence SBn with the system program GRAPH 5

(just as for a main sequence).

Once you have completed programming, you must call DB-GEN

on the PG to generatetupdate the data blocks. DB-GEN generates
the DB for all sequence blocks (main sequence and sub-sequence).

Once you have completed the work outlined in Section 4.7.2 you
can load the PLC with the generated blocks and the required
standard blocks (refer to Section 4.3.3 or 4.3.4).

Creating Sequencers

Testing and Starting Up

Testing and Starting Up

4.8

4.8.1
Transferring the
Program

The menu Object - Blocks - Transfer is described in the STEP 5

manual.

4.8.2
GRAPH 5 Status

The status display indicates the status of the currently active

sequencer.
The active steps are marked with a " " symbol.
By positioning the cursor on a step or transition in the overview
display, and then pressing SHIFT F5 (Zoom-in), you can display
the status of the contents of the step or transition. This allows you
to check the status of individual inputs and outputs at the zoom-in
level.

Status display of the sequencer at the overview level

C : [email protected]

SE 10

LEN =270
STATUS

TM :
5 4 :

TW :

. . .

ID screen

Status processing active

Search

Half scr

TM-TW

Zoom-in

Seg com

Save

Help

Edit

Enter

Cancel

Creating Sequencers

In the status display at the overview level, the functions F4

(TMDW), F6 (Search) and F7 (ID screen) are available.

Example

You want to display the status of SB 10.

Status display of the sequencer at the zoom-in level

The status of the content of a step or transition can be displayed
and corresponds to the status display of a segment.

Ready to start? Status display at the overview level.

Keystrokes

Position the cursor on a step or transition.

Press SHIFT F5 (Zoom-in).

The segment of the selected step or transition is displayed in the

STATUS mode.
SB l0

- SIMULTAN

TRANSITION 411

-SENSOR

LEN = 270

POSITION REACHED

.m

STATUS BLOCK: SB 10

:BE

SEARCH

STATUS

Testing and Starting Up

Displaying waiting and monitoring times

Ready to start? Status display at the overview level.

Keystrokes

Position the cursor on a step with a monitoring

time (TM) andlor waiting time (TW).

C : [email protected]

LEN = 270
STATUS

44

.
step 2 is active

TM : STOPPED
TM:KT10.2

TW :
TW:

Status processing active

ID screen

F
Search

TM-W

Cancel

If the step is active, the current timer values are displayed. Once
the monitoring time has elapsed, the message STOPPED is displayed.

Creating Sequencers

The Standard Blocks

4.9

The Standard Blocks

For the fast versions, the following blocks are available:
FB 72, SB 2
FB 73, SB 3
FB 74
FB 75

fast version for simple modes with alternative

and simultaneous branches
fast version for simple modes with alternative
branches, but without simultaneous branches
functions additional to FB 72, FB 73
saving and re-activating waiting and
monitoring times

For the standard versions, the following blocks are available:

FB 70, SB 0
FB 71, SB 0
FB 75

standard version with more modes

sub-sequences for the standard version
saving and re-activating waiting and
monitoring times

Creating Sequencers

4.9.1
Fast Versions

With these FBs you can run linear and alternative sequences

4.9.1. l
FB 72 /SB 2 for
Linear, Alternative
and Simultaneous
Sequences

Calling the function block

GPH:SIMI
SBNR
AUS

STO

NH
TIPP
Tt1
QIT

Displays and operating elements

(SBNR)
(Aus, A/H)
(TIPP, T+1)
(QIT)
(ST0)

Number of the user sequence block

Modes OFFIAUTONAN
EXECUTE with condition with actions
Acknowledge a timeout
Timeout

SB 2 for processing the sequencer

You require this block for processing GRAPH 5 functions in the
PLC.You only need to transfer SE 2 to the PLC.

The Standard Blocks

4.9.1.2

FB 73lSB 3 for
Linear and
Alternative
Sequences

Calling the function block

GPH:LINI
SBNR
AUS

STO

NH
TIPP
Tt1
QIT

Displays and operating elements

(SBNR)
(Aus, A/H)
(TIPP, T+1)
(QIT)
PTO)

Number of the user sequence block

Modes OFFIAUTONAN
EXECUTE with condition with actions
Acknowledge a timeout
Timeout

SB 3 for processing the sequencer

You require this block for processing GRAPH 5 functions in the
PLC.You only need to transfer SB 3 to the PLC.

Creating Sequencers

Parameters for
FB 72 and FB 73

1 SBNR

Para
type

Data
type

Meaning

Remarks

KF

Sequence block no.

Number of the sequence block to be processed

y;rieauence

1 AUS

Sequencer OFF

block must be created with GRAPH 5

Evaluation as permanent signal

AUS = 1 + AUS active

Effect:

deselects the current mode

sequencer set to step 0

STO deleted

output commands of all steps, except latching

statements, are disabled

Note:
If AUS = 1 no other mode can be selected
Evaluation as permanent signal
A/H = 1 AUTOMATIC active

Condition:
AUS = 0

Effect:

if the sequencer is in step 0, the INIT steps are set

ifA/H=l

the sequencer switches further owing to the

satisfied transitions

1-

step output commands are active

The Standard Blocks

Name

Para

type

1 TIPP

Data
type

Meaning

Remarks

B1

Mode EXECUTE
single step with
condition

Evaluation as permanent signal

TIPP = 1 + TIPP operation active

Condition:
N H = 0 and AUS=O

Effect:

sequencer with corresponding transition switches

further at a signal change from 0 to 1 at parameter
T+ 1

step output commands active

wait times are effective

monitoring times are not effective

if the sequencer is in step 0, the INIT steps are set

with T + l

Switch further in
EXECUTEisingle step

Evaluation of signal change from 0 to 1

For effect. refer to TIPP

ACKNOWLEDGMEN
of a timeout

Evaluation of signal change from 0 to 1

Effective when timeout STO is active due to elapsed
monitoring time TM or TM-MIN

Effect in AUTOMATIC
Step enabling by
1. Transition satisfied
2. QIT = 1 (positive edge)
+ STO becomes = 0
Effect in EXECUTE
Step enabling by
1. Transition satisfied
2. QIT = 1 (positive edge)
+ STO becomes = 0
3. T + l = l (positive edge)
Effect in MANUAL
( N H = 0, TIPP = 0)
1. QIT = 1 (positive edge)
STO becomes = 0, regardless of the transitions
TIMEOUT

Signal state = l when:

sequencer has a timeout due to elapsed monitoring time
TM.ITM-MIN
Note:switching further only possible with QIT

Creating Sequencers

Recommendation

4.9.1.3
FB 74, Additional
Functions for
FB 72/73

Unused input or output parameters can be supplied values from

the flag area flag word 206 to 216.
Remember that the input parameters must be at RLO = 0 and the
output parameters must be written constantly.

FB 74 is only effective in conjunction with blocks FB 72 or

FB 73; it must be called unconditionally with JU FB 74 before
FB 72 or FB 73 is called and is used to implement additional
modes.

Calling the function block

GPH:ZFKI
SBNR
TIP0
SANW
SLOE
S-NR
S-UE
SYN

Displays and operating elements

(SBNR)
PIP0)
(SANW, S-NR, S-UE)
(SLOE, S-NR, S-UE)
(SYN)

Number of the user sequence block

EXECUTE without condition
Step selection in BCD code
Delete step in BCD code
Synchronization

The Standard Blocks

Parameters for
FB 74

1 SBNR

Para
type

Data
type

Meaning

Remarks

KF

Sequencer

Number of the sequence block to be processed, same

value as for FB 72 / FB 73

Execute without
condition (single step)

Evaluation as permanent signal

ll B 1 ll
l

~~ ~~ ~~
~ ~ ~

l SANW

Step selection

B1

~l ~l ~l
l

1 Condition:

In FB 72 / 73: EXECUTE, (TIPP = 1, A/H = 0,

AUS = 0) with T+1 all levels are switched further
without a condition without a special program in
the transitions, (refer to program example no. 9)

Effect:

sequencer switches further without a valid transition

output commands active

waiting times are not effective

monitoring times are not effective

Evaluation as permanent signal

Condition:
only effective in MANUAL (TIF'P

1 Effect:

= 0, TIP0 = 0)

In the sequencer, the step number selected in the

parameter S-NR is set with a positive edge at S-UE.

Only one step can be set in linear sequencer

Any number of steps can be set in simultaneous
sequences. The structure of the sequencer must be kept
in mind otherwise incorrect reaction when switching
over to AUTOIEXECUTE

Last s t e ~set indicated in DW 20 of the DB x

+
SLOE

Delete step

B1

Evaluation as permanent signal

Condition:
only effective in MANUAL (TIPP = 0, SANW = 0)

Effect:
In the sequencer, the step selected in S-NR is
deleted with signal change at S-UE

Last deleted step indicated in DW 20 of the DB X

Caution:

1 Step number

After deleting the last step: DW 20 = 0

further edge; renewed attempts to delete lead to repeated
indication of the last step deleted

1 Evaluation in BCD code, 3-digit (right justified)

Note:
You can use the 4th digit of the word for the parameter
Permitted operands:
IW, QW, F W , in DBx: DW 240 to DW 255

S-UE

B1

Signal for step

selectioddelete step

Evaluation with signal change from 0 to 1

SYN

B1

Synchronization

Evaluation as permanent signal only effective in AUTO

with FB 72/73

1 (This parameter has

Effect:

nothing to do with

waitingimonitoring times not effective

synchronization

sequencer runs to next fulfilled transition

described in Chapter 5 ) Note:

The synchronization requires considerable programming
in the transitions refer to program example no. 11

Automatic program synchronization is possible as

described in Chapter S.

The Standard Blocks

4.9.1.4

Description of the
Modes of FB 72
and FB 73

Sequencer in OFF

Keystrokes

Parameter OFF = 1 (continuous signal)

other parameters can have any signal state.

Effect

Deselects the current mode;

sequencer is set to step 0;
STO is deleted;
output commands of all steps, except latching
statements, are disabled.

Note
Only the output commands programmed as an assignment
(=Q x.y) are disabled.
The latching output commands (S Q x.y) must be disabled by a
delete program.

Note

The OFF mode has the highest priority.

Creating Sequencers

MANUAL operation (setting up)

Keystrokes

A/H = 0, TIPP = 0, AUS = 0

Effect

waiting times not effective;

monitoring times no longer effective;
existing STO retained;
step number retained;
output commands are inactive due to F 233.0
and can be activated via F 205.6;
subordinate operationlsetting up operation
possible (see programming examples).

Note

MANUAL operation (setting up) has the

lowest priority.

The Standard Blocks

AUTOMATIC
Keystrokes

A/H =l,TIPP = 0, AUS = 0

Effect

Automatic enabling of the steps according to

the programmed transition. If the sequencer is
in step 0, the INIT steps are started.
current step output commands (actions) active
due to F 233.0.
The waiting times programmed in the sequence
structure are effective.
The monitoring times in the sequence structure
are effective.
A timeout occurs when:
1. the monitoring time TM of a step has
elapsed (group signal STO)
2. the transition is satisfied within the time
TM-MIN (time value TW + D 33.2 = 1).

For implementing "automatic start with enter key" refer to

Section 4.9.4, example number 1)

Note

A/H = 1 and TIPP = 1

A/H has higher priority than TIPP

EXECUTE with condition and command output

Keystrokes

TIPP = 1, A/H = 0, AUS = 0

Positive edge at T+l

Effect

With a positive edge at T + l and if TW has

elapsed, the sequencer moves on one step
further per simultaneous branch if the transition
is satisfied.
If the sequencer is in step 0, the INIT steps are
started.
Waiting times are effective.
Monitoring times TM are not effective.
Current step output commands (actions) are
active due to F 233.0 being active.
The sequencer runs as in the automatic mode,
simultaneous branches are processed in parallel.

Note

EXECUTE is only active when MANUAL

operation (A/H=O) is selected.

Further information
Programming example for:
EXECUTE without condition (FB 74 refer to example 9)
EXECUTE without command output (refer to example 8)
EXECUTE with indication of step enabling
(refer to example 10)

The Standard Blocks

TIMEOUT STO = 1
- Caused by TM elapsing or TM-MIN not being reached
(only in AUTOMATIC).
Effect

Sequencer is stopped.
Command output remains active and can be
influenced via D 33.0 (for assignments of all
steps = 0) or via D 33.1 (only assignments of
the steps with a timeout = 0).
Continuation only with acknowledgement (QIT).

Keystrokes

I.) in AUTOMATIC:
a) Clear timeout (transition satisfied)
b) Activate QIT

Effect

+= Sequencer moves on to all steps for which

the cause of the timeout has been eliminated.

Keystrokes

11.) in EXECUTE:
a) Clear timeout (transition satisfied)
b) Activate QIT
c) Activate T+l

Effect

+= The sequencer moves on to all steps for

which the cause of the timeout is eliminated.

Creating Sequencers
4.9.1.5

Description of the
Modes of FB 74

FB 74 is only effective in conjunction with FB 72/73 and

implements additional functions. It can be called directly before
FB 72/73 with the unconditional call JU FB 74.

EXECUTE WITHOUT CONDITION

Keystrokes

TIP0 = l (continuous signal)

In FB 72/73 EXECUTE (TIPP = 1, A/H = 0)
+=
All levels switch further without a
condition, with T + l without the programmed
transitions, the actions are active (refer to
Section 4.9.4, example number 811).

STEP SELECTION (SANW) / DEACTIVATE STEP (SLOE)

Keystrokes

1. SANW = 1, SLOE = 0:
step selection / activate step or
2. SANW = 0, SLOE = 1: deactivate step

In FB 72/73: MANUAL operation: A/H = 0, TIPP = 0;

with S-NR, select the number of the step to be
setldeleted in BCD code.
3. Activate with S-UE = step number (S-NR).

The Standard Blocks

Effect

General: actions = 0
The structure of the simultaneous sequence
cannot be checked by the system in the STEP
SELECTION mode, i.e.:

you can activate more than one step in a

simultaneous sequence.
if only one step is set in the whole
sequence and if this is deactivated by
SLOE, the sequencer is set to step 0. After
further SLOE attempts, the last deactivated
step is indicated.

Note
Prior to SANW, the sequencer should be switched to OFF. This
means that all steps are deleted and no selective deleting is
required.

Step display
During the STEP SELECTION/DEACTIVATE STEP mode, the
step numbers of levels 2 - 8 are deleted in DW 21-27 of DB X and
no longer updated so that the steps influenced cannot be checked.
The last step number to be processed is simply stored in DW 20
of DB X at SANW and SLOE. DW 20 is then responsible for all
levels in this situation. DW 21 - 27 only contain the current status
for levels 2 - 8 again after enabling the steps in AUTO or
EXECUTE.

Note
Since the structure of the sequencer is not checked, illogical
setting or resetting of steps can lead to incorrect responses
when you switch over to AUTO or EXECUTE. You must take
full responsibility for safe and correct activation of the steps.

Creating Sequencers

SYNCHRONIZATION
Keystrokes

SYN = 1
in FB 72/73 AUTO (A/H = 1)

Effect

TWITM are reset with SYN.

In the automatic mode, the sequencer runs as

far as the first non-satisfied transition. A certain
amount of programming is necessary to
achieve this.

Condition

You cannot program synchronization generally

in the system, since the same transitions may
occur at several different locations.
For this reason, you must program the
conditions for moving on to the current steps
extra in the transitions as a parallel branch.

Note

The sequencer is also in the AUTO mode

(actions active), for this reason, the actions in
the steps should be interlocked with the SYN
signal. (Refer to Section 4.9.4, example
number 10).

Note
The synchronization parameter has nothing to do with process
synchronization as described in Chapter 5.

The Standard Blocks

4.9.1.6

Possible Modes of
FB 72, FB 73 and
FB 74
Implemented with
Sequencer OFF (RESET)

FB 72/73

AUTOMATIC

FB 72/73

MANUAL

FB 72/73

1 EXECUTE with condition

1 FB 72/73

1 FB 72/73, FB 74

1 FB 72/73

EXECUTE without condition

1 STEP SELECTIONDEACTIVATE STEP

SYNCHRONIZATION

1 TIMEOUT
ACmowLEDGEMENT of the timeout

1 Mode

Parameters 1)
FB 72173FB 74

1 AUS
0

AIH

TIPP TIP0

wiSYN~

SAN

1 Effect

~ ~
Actions

Remark
Sequencer stopped at step
0, other modes disabled

AUTOMATIC

Enable step if transition

satisfied, TW, TM effective

EXECUTE with
condition

Step enabled if transition

satisfied with T+1, TW
effective. TM not effective

Subordinate
MODE/ SETTING
UP

Each movement must be

linked into the step with the
manual flag F 205.6

EXECUTE without
condition

No special programming
necessary in transition, TW,
TM not effective.

Stev selection
1

Synchronization

Special programming in
transition. TW, TM not
effective.

1:signal state of the parameter "1"

0:signal state of the parameter "0"
X:parameter can have any signal state
1): refer to Section 4.9.1 for an explanation of the parameters

Note
Other constellations cause mixed reactions.

The Standard Blocks

4.9.2
Standard Version
4.9.2.1
FB 70lSB 0 for a
Main Sequence

Using this FB, you can process linear, alternative and

simultaneous sequences. If you also include FB 71, you can also
process sub-sequences.

Calling the function block

FB 70
GPH:HKET
- SBNR
-AUS
-NH
- B-UE
- N-ST
- KEND
- SSMB
-T+1
- MAKT
- SANW
- S-NR
- S-UE
- QIT
- UQIT
- DlAG
-ANZ+

UBET
STO
SANZ
SSTO
S+AK
ZUST

Displays and operating elements

Input parameters

Output parameters

(SBNR)
(AUS, A/H, B-UE)
P-ST)
(KEN=))
(SSMB, T+1)
(MAKT)
(SANW, S-NR, S-UE)
(QIT, UQIT)
PIAG)
(ANZ+)
(UBET)
PTO)
(SANZ)
(SSTO)
(S+W
(ZUST)

Number of the user sequence block

Modes OFFIAUTOIMAN
RESET or warm restart
Automatic end of sequencer
Step control with conditions
Command output deselectable
Step selection with decade switch in BCD code
Achowledge a timeout
Select extended diagnosis
Move on step display
Enable subordinate mode
General timeout
Display of step number in BCD code
Timeout in displayed step
More than one step simultaneously active
Operating statusloperator error

Creating Sequencers

SB 0 for sequencer processing

You require this block for processing GRAPH 5 functions in the
PLC.SB 0 is only transferred to the PLC.

Parameters of FB 70

Name

Para
type

Data
type

Meaning

Remarks

SBNR

KF

Sequencer

Number of the sequence block to be processed

Note:
The sequence block must be created with GRAPH 5

1 AUS

Sequencer OFF
(Reset)

Evaluation as permanent signal

AUS = 1

AUS active

Deselects the current mode

Sequencer is set to step 0

Output commands of all steps except latching steps

are disabled

Note:
With AUS = 1, no other mode can be selected
I

B1

Mode

Evaluation as permanent signal

AUTOMATIC1
MANUAL

Condition:

A/H = 1

AUTOMATIC selected

The AUTO mode is activated with the signal parameter

B-UE
AUTO active

Output commands active

NH =0

MANUAL active

Note:
The sequencer can be switched further owing to the
satisfied transitions
Switching over to manual immediately terminates the
automatic mode. Output commands are disabled.

The Standard Blocks

;:

Meaning
Activate mode
AUTO and SSMB

Remarks

1 Evaluation with signal change from 0 to 1

Effect:
The signal state = 1 at A/H or SSMB is adopted
N-ST

I/Q

B1

COLD RESTART on
PLC

Evaluation as permanent signal of the manual cold restart

on the PLC:

Condition:
or

Effect:
As follows:

the whole sequencer is deactivated

COLD RESTART
for

the mode is deselected

whole program

all output commands are disabled

the sequencer is set to step 0

Condition:
N-ST = 1

Effect:
or

WARM RESTART
for sequencer

step number before stop state retained

mode before stop state retained

output commands of the current steps remain set

Caution:
The only permitted parameter is a flag bit <= F 199.7 or
F 206.0 to F 218.7.
This flag must not be used for other parameters, since it is
continuously set to 1 by FB 70.
The operand N-ST only needs to be programmed when the
warm restart function is required.
In this case the flag N-ST must be set in the start-up OB
of the PLC.
COLD RESTART
for remaining
vroeram

the program external to the sequencer goes through a

cold restart according to the PLC description

~
~~

~~
~
~

Name

Para
type

Data
type

Meaning

Remarks

KEND

B1

Sequencer end activate

Evaluation as permanent signal

Condition:
KEND = 1:
Effect:

SSMB

Step control with

condition

the sequencer is stopped at step 0 only in

AUTOMATIC

all other reactions as for OFF

Evaluation as permanent signal

Condition:
SSMB = 1 (A/H = 0, SANW = 0)

SSMB selected

SSMB is adopted with the signal parameter B-UE

SSMB active

Effect:

MAKT

sequencer switches further if transition satisfied and

signal change from 0 to 1 at parameter T + l

the step output commands are only active with

MAKT = 1

the programmed waiting times are effective

the programmed monitoring times are not effective

Switch further in
SSMB

Evaluation with signal change from 0 to 1; only effective

in mode SSMB

Command output of
step commands

Evaluation as permanent signal

Condition:
only effective in SSMB

Effect:

MAKT = 1: output commands in step are set. The

sub-sequence (FB 71) is only active when MAKT = 1

MAKT = 0: all non-latching output commands in the

steps are disabled

The Standard Blocks

Name
SANW

Para
type

Data
type

Meaning

Remarks

Step selection

Evaluation as permanent signal;

Condition:
only effective when A/H = 0

Effect:
the sequencer is set to the step number selected with the
parameter S-NR with a signal edge at S-UE
S-NR

Step number for

SANW

Evaluation in BCD code; 3-digit

refer to SANW

Note:
the first decade of the word for the parameter S-NR can be
used for the program external to the sequencer
permitted operators:
IW, QW, FW, DB X: DW 240-255
S-UE

Signal to activate
step selection

Evaluation with signal change from 0 to 1;

refer to SANW
Signal to activate S-NR effective when SANW = 1

QIT

Acknowledge a
timeout

Evaluation with signal change from 0 to 1

effective when:
there is a timeout STO due to monitoring time TM
ITM-MIN
Step enabling possible when the step enabling condition is

Unconditional
achowledgment of
a timeout

Evaluation with signal change from 0 to 1

Effective when:
there is a timeout STO due to monitoring time
TMITM-MIN

1 Step enabling not dependent on step enabling conditions

Name

Para
type

Data
type

Meaning

Remarks

DIAG

B1

Test diagnosis

DIAG = 1:
with the test diagnosis, the basic conditions for running the
sequencer on the PLC are checked and errors indicated in
bits 12 - 15 in the ZUST operating status.
If an error is detected, the sequencer cannot be processed.
DIAG = 0:
To save cycle time, the functions above are disabled.

1 ANZ+

B1

Move on step display

Evaluation with signal change from 0 to 1;

if several steps are set simultaneously (with simultaneous
branches), these step numbers can be displayed one after
the other in the step display SANZ.

UBET

B1

Subordinate mode
(= setting up)

Signal state = l when MANUAL (A/H = 0) and SSMB =

0 and SANW = 0
(no mode selected)

Response of the sequencer:

The step number is retained.
The step output commands are disabled apart from
latching commands.
The step output command can be controlled regardless of
the step functions using the manual flag F 205.6.
B1

General timeout

Signal state = 1 because sequencer has a timeout due to

elapsed monitoring time TMITM-MIN

Note:
Step enabling only possible with QIT or UQIT.
SSTO

Timeout in step

Signal state = 1 because sequencer has a timeout due to

elapsed monitoring time TMITM-MIN, and a step with a
timeout is indicated in SANZ
(refer to ANZ+, SANZ).

Note:
Step enabling can only be forced with UQIT.

The Standard Blocks

Name
SANZ

Para
type

Data
type

Meaning

Remarks

Step display

Display of the step number in BCD code, 3-digit

Note:
The 4th decade of the word for the parameter SANZ can
be used for the program external to the sequencer (refer to
ANZ+, SSTO)
Permitted operands:
IW, QW, FW, DBx: DW 240 - 255

Step display

Signal state = 1, when more than one step is active

simultaneously (with simultaneous branches).

Creating Sequencers
Name

Para
type

Data
type

Meaning

ZUST

Mode status word

Remarks

Signal state = l when

0:sequencer in OFF mode
1:sequencer in AUTO mode
2:sequencer in MANUAL mode
3:reserved
4:sequencer in SANW mode
5:reserved
6:sequencer in SSMB
7:SSMB and MAKT
8:DIAG
9:KEND selected and sequencer end reached in AUTO
l0:step 0 is set
ll:incompatible, PGPLC software
12:SB 0 does not exist (PLC)
13:working data block DB X not loaded on PLC
14:the sequence block (SBNR) to be processed is
not programmed in GRAPH 5
Bit 15:the sequence block (SBNR) to be processed is not loaded on the PLC

Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit

Caution:
permitted operand for ZUST only IW, QW, F W (< FW
200), DB X: DW 240 - 255

Remarks:
when: bits 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 are set the sequencer is not
processed. These checks are only made when DIAG = 1.

Recommendation

Unused input and output parameters can be supplied from flag

area flag word 206 to 216.
Remember that the input parameters must have RLO = 0 applied
and the output parameters must be written to continuously.

The Standard Blocks

4.9.2.2

FB 71lSB 0 for
Sub-Sequences

This FB can be used in addition to FB 70.

Calling the function block

GPH:UKET
-SBNR

STO

- HKET

SSTO

-STRT

SAN2

-S-NR

S+AK

-S-UE

UEND

UQIT

ZUST

ANZ+
DIAG

Displays and operating elements

Input parameters

Output parameters

(SBNR)
PET)
(STRT)
(S-NR, S-UE)
PQIT)
WZ+)
PIAG)
(STO)
(SSTO)
(S+AK)
PEN")
(ZUST)

Number of the sequence block

Modes of the main sequence
Start sequencer
Step selection with decade switch in BCD code
Acknowledge a timeout
Move on step display
Select extended diagnosis
General timeout
Timeout in displayed step
Display of step number in BCD code
More than one step active simultaneously
End of sub-sequence
Operating statusioperator error

SB 0 for sequence processing

This block is required for processing GRAPH 5 functions on the
PLC.SB 0 is only transferred to the PLC.

Creating Sequencers

Parameters of FB 71
Name

Para
type

Data
type

Meaning

Remarks

SBNR

KF

Sequencer

Number of the sequence block to be processed

Note:
The sequence block must be created with GRAPH 5

HKET

not used

The modes of the main sequencer are activated internally

Supply using any flag word

STRT

B1

1 S-NR

Start of the
sub-sequence

Evaluation with signal change from 0 to 1

Step number for

SANW

Evaluation in BCD code; 3-digit

(refer to SANW)
Note:
The first decade of the word for the parameter S-NR can
be used for the program external to the sequencer.
Permitted operators:
IW, QW, FW, DBx: DW 240 - 255

1 S-UE

Signal to activate step

selection

Evaluation with signal change from 0 to 1;

(refer to SANW)
Signal to activate S-NR effective when SANW = 1

Unconditional
acknowledgment of a
timeout

Evaluation with signal change from 0 to 1

Effective, when:
there is a timeout STO due to lapsed monitoring time
TMITM-MIN
Step enabling not dependent on the step enabling
conditions

DIAG

B1

Test diagnosis

1 with the test diagnosis, the basic conditions for running 1

the sequencer on the PLC are checked and errors
indicated in bits 12 - 15 in the ZUST operating status.
If an error is detected, the sequencer cannot be processed.
DIAG = 0:
To save cycle time, the functions above are disabled.

Move on step display

Evaluation with signal change from 0 to 1;

if several steps are set simultaneously (with simultaneous
branches), these step numbers can be displayed one after
the other in the step display SANZ.

The Standard Blocks

Name

Para
type

Data
type

Meaning

Remarks

STO

B1

General timeout

Signal state = 1because sequencer has a timeout due to

elapsed monitoring time TMITM-MIN

SSTO

B1

Timeout in step

Signal state = 1because sequencer has a timeout due to

elapsed monitoring time TMITM-MIN, and a step with a
timeout is indicated in SANZ
(refer to ANZ+, SANZ).
Note:
Step enabling can only be forced with UQIT.

SANZ

Step display

Display of the step number in BCD code, 3-digit

Note:
The 4th decade of the word for the parameter SANZ can
be used for the program external to the sequencer (refer
to ANZ+, SSTO)
Permitted operands:
IW, QW, FW, DBx: DW 240 - 255

S+AK

B1

Step display

Signal state = 1, when more than one step is active

simultaneously (with simultaneous branches).

UEND

B1

Sub-sequence end

UEND = 1:
Sequence not yet started or
sequence processed to the end
UEND = 0:
Sequence has started in AUTO or MANUAL mode
Note:
The parameter must be scanned for status = 1 in the
transition of the main sequence following the step with
the sub-sequence call
(step enabling condition for the main sequence).

Name

Para
type

Data
type

Meaning

ZUST

Operating status word

Remarks

Signal state = l when

0:sequencer in OFF mode
1:sequencer in AUTO mode
2:sequencer in MANUAL mode
3:reserved
4:sequencer in SANW mode
5:reserved
6:sequencer in SSMB)
7:SSMB and MAKT
8:DIAG
9:KEND selected and sequencer end reached in AUTO
l0:step 0 is set
ll:incompatible, PGPLC software
12:SB 0 does not exist (PLC)
13:working data block DB X not loaded on PLC
14:the sequence block (SBNR) to be processed is
not programmed in GRAPH 5
Bit 15:the sequence block (SBNR) to be processed is not
in the PLC

Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit

1 Caution:
permitted operand for ZUST only IW, QW, F W
(< FW 200), DB X: DW 240 - 255
Remarks:
when: bits 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 are set the sequencer is not
processed. These checks are only made when DIAG = 1.

The modes required bit 0-71 T+l/acknowledge and S 0 active are

activated internally by the sub-sequence.

The Standard Blocks

e.g.: ZUST = FW 24
FY 24

FY 25

FW 24
P Bit 0
P Bit 1
P Bit 2
P Bit 3
P Bit 4
P Bit 5
'L Bit 6
P

i.e.: F 25.1 g

AUTO mode

or F 24.2 g

Step 0 is set

i
P Bit 10
P Bit 11
"it
12
"it
13
P Bit 14
P Bit 15

Word parameters S-NR, SANZ, ZUST

only IW, QW, FW, DB X: DW 240 - 255 permitted
calling a data block with C DB .. before FB 70 does not
allow other data words to be used, since the user data block is
switched over by the standard FB

Parameters S-NR and SANZ

The parameters S-NR and SANZ must be at least 12-bit long
words: for this reason the smallest parameter type is a word (16
bits). The four bits of the 4th decade of S-NR and SANZ can be
used by other programs; refer to the following examples.

Creating Sequencers

Parameter S-NR
Wiring:
Connection for decade switch (3-digit). The decade switch must
provide its value in BCD code.

Parameter SANZ
Wiring:
Connection to 7-segment display; the value for this display is
supplied in BCD code.

Example: S-NR = IW 10
Example: SAN2 = QW 8

QB 8

QB 9

IB 10

IB 11

10.7.. . 10.4

10.3.. . 10.0

11.7.. . 11.4

11.3.. . 11.0

- - - -

FREE

HUNDREDS

TENS

4th decade

3rd decade

2nd decade

l
Ist decade

Value within the

decades
Value in BCD

4th decade
The input of the 4th decade can be used freely for other programs.

The Standard Blocks

4.9.2.3

Description of the
Modes of FB 70171

Mode OFF: sequencer stopped

Keystrokes

Parameter AUS = 1,continuous signal required

other parameters: any signal state

Effect

All functions and modes are disabled.

A new mode can only be selected when OFF is
deactivated.
After deactivating OFF, step 0 is set but not the
INIT steps.

Note
Output commands programmed as latching (SQxy, SFna...) are
not disabled when the sequencer is OFF.

Mode AUTO: normal operation

Keystrokes

1.Parameter AD3 = 1, continuous signal

required (AUS = 0).
2. Activated with a positive edge at parameter
B-UE
(key function, corresponds to AUTO START)

Creating Sequencers

Effect

Steps automatically enabled according to the

programmed transition.
The step output commands (actions) of the
current steps are activated.
The waiting times programmed in the sequence
structure are effective.
The monitoring times programmed in the
sequence structure are effective.
A timeout occurs when:

the monitoring time TM of a step has elapsed (group signal STO)

when the transition is satisfied within the
time TM-MIN (time value TW + D 33.2
= 1).

Clearing the timeout and enabling steps with QIT

(acknowledge)
Condition

An error has occurred in step n. The

sub-sequence transition must be active and
satisfied to ensure that the sequence continues
to run normally.

Keystrokes

Positive edge (key function) at parameter QIT.

Effect

All the steps fulfilling the condition above

(several steps in simultaneous branches) switch
on to the next step according to the sequence
structure. The STO message is reset.

Note
Response to timeouts as with FB 72/73.

The Standard Blocks

UQIT (unconditional acknowledgement)

Condition

AUTO or SSMB active (in all other modes

only the timeouts are cleared).

Keystrokes

Positive edge (key function) at parameter UQIT.

Effect

The STO or SSTO message is cleared. If the

condition above is met, the sequencer enables
the next step according to the sequence
structure, ignoring the transition.
With simultaneous branches, all active steps
move on one step unconditionally.

Note on QIT / UQIT

QIT and UQIT are only effective when there is
a timeout (STO). UQIT enables the next step
unconditionally and without a timeout. The
next step can only be enabled after the waiting
time has elapsed. (Refer also to table:
acknowledging a timeout, Section 4.7.2.3)

Creating Sequencers

MANUAL mode
The mode is switched from AUTO to MANUAL with the
parameter A/H. To use the MANUAL mode you must set the
parameter A/H = 0. In this mode you can then select the following:
Step control with condition
Step selection
Subordinate mode

(SSMB)
(SANW)
PET)

Keystrokes

Parameter A/H = 0, AUS = 0

Effect

The output commands of the steps are disabled

or remain disabled. Latching output commands,
however, remain set if they were active prior to
the MANUAL mode. The previous step
number is retained.

The Standard Blocks

MANUAL mode: step control with condition (SSMB)

Keystrokes

1.A/H = 0 (MANUAL) AUS = 0

2. SSMB = 1 and SANW = 0, continuous
signal required (mutual interlock)
3. Activated with a positive signal edge at
parameter B-UE (key function).

Effect

Step enabled when:

1. The next transition is satisfied (no timeout)
and ( ! )
2. A positive signal edge at parameter T t 1 (key
function)

The monitoring times programmed in the

sequence structure are not effective.
You can disable the step output commands
with the parameter MAKT (apart from latching
commands.
MAKT = 1, command output active
MAKT = 0, command output not active

Note

In SSMB, the sequencer is processed as in the

AUTO mode, but is controlled with the key
T t l . Simultaneous branches are processed in
parallel as in the AUTO mode. T t 1 functions
as an additional transition condition.
A current timeout must be acknowledged.

Creating Sequencers

MANUAL mode: step selection (SANW), only with main

sequences
Selecting and setting a step

Condition

Sequencer in MANUAL A/H = 0, AUS = 0,

SSMB = 0
Selected step number in S-NR c highest step
number of the sequencer and not equal to zero.

Keystrokes

1.A/H = 0 (MANUAL)
2. SANW = 1 and SSMB = 0 (mutual interlock)
3. Activated with positive signal edge at
parameter S-UE (key function).

Effect

Step output commands remain disabled. The

selected step number is set. Even with
simultaneous sequences, you can only set one
step of the whole sequencer. If you select a
step in a further simultaneous branch, the step
in the previous simultaneous branch is cleared.
Waiting and monitoring times are not activated.

MANUAL mode: subordinate mode (UBET)

Condition

AUS=O,SANW=O,SSMB=O,A/H=O

Effect

Step output commands are disabled.

The previous step number is retained.
The step output commands can be controlled
regardless of the transition and the step
numbers using manual flag F 205.6 (single
controVsetting up).
Signal parameter UBET = 1.

The Standard Blocks

4.9.2.4

Possible Modes
for the Sequencer

The modes are determined by the signal states at the parameters

of FB 70PB 71.

OFF (reset)
priority over AUTO
and MAN

*)

1
AUTOMATIC

MANUAL
STEP
CONTROL

NORMAL OP.

Automatic switching
according to transitions

Actions MAN
switched off
Waiting timeslmonitortime effective

Due to TMITM-MIN
elapsed

Sequencer stops

Switch further with key

T+1 if transition
fulfilled

Actions AUTO
can be switched off
Actions MAN
switched off

Actions AUTO active

TIMEOUT

STEP
SELECTION

Set a step
via S-NR
with enter key
S-UE

Actions AUTOIMAN
switched off

SUBORD.
OPERATION

Setup mode
effective, if SSMB,
AUTO, AUS and
SANW switched off

Actions AUTO
switched off

Actions MAN active

(via F 205,06)

Waiting times effective

Monitoring times
not effective

Actions Auto active1

inactive selectable
Switching further possible with acknowledge
(QITAJQIT signal)

*)When switching over from AUTO to MANUAL and vice-versa, the current step
number and the current timeout are retained.

Creating Sequencers
4.9.2.5

Switching Over
Modes

Mode after switchover

AUTO

SSMB

SANW

Keystrokes:
1. NH=O -> Act=O
-> S=const.
-> TW=
const.
2. SSMB=I
3. B-UE=1
-> Act active
when MAKT=I

AUTO

t>l

UBET

Keystrokes:
1. NH=O -> Act=O
-> S=const.
-> Tw=O
2. SANW=I
3. Set step with
S-UE=IJ

Keystrokes:
1. NH=O -> Act=O
-> S=const.
-> TW=
const.
2. SSMB=O
3. SANW=O

Keystrokes:
1. SSMB=O -> S=const.
-> Tw=O
2. SANW=I
3. Set step with
S-UE=IJ

Keystrokes:
1. SSMB=O -> S=const.
-> TW=
const.
2. SANW=O

c
0
W
.-

P
a,
a

a,

U
0

Keystrokes:
1. N H = I -> S=const.
-> TW=
SSMB
const.
2. B-UE=IJ
-> Act active
Keystrokes:
1. N H = I -> S=const.
2. B-UE=IJ
sANW
-> A C active
~

Keystrokes:
1. SANW=O -> S=const.
2. SSMB=I
3. B-UE=I
-> Act active
when MAKT=I

Keystrokes:
1. N H = I -> S=const.
UBET 2. B-UE=I
-> Act active

Keystrokes:
Keystrokes:
2. SSMB=I -> S=const. 1. SANW=I -> S=const.
3. B-UE=1
2. Set step with
S-UE=I
-> Act active
when MAKT=I

S=const.: step no. retained

Keystrokes:
1. SANW=O -> S=const.
(2.SSMB=O)

1
1

TW = const.: a started waiting time is not reset

: positive-going edge (key function) TW = 0

: a started waiting time is cleared

The Standard Blocks

Parameter setting

Response of se uencer
resulting mode

l)

h'

AUS A/H KEND SSMB MAKT SANW AUS AUTO HAND UBET SSMB MAKT SANW
0

Keystrokes:
0
I. SSMB+B-UE~)

14)

1: Signal state of the parameter " l "

0: Signal state of the parameter "0"

X: Parameter can have any signal state

#:

Response of the sequencer as described

in the modes

SSMB cannot be activated with

B-UE
SSMB without command output
SSMB with command output

1) For an explanation of the parameters

refer to FB 70 (Section 4.4.2.1)

AUTO preselected

2) AUTO and SSMB only become active

with a signal edge at B-UE

AUTO with priority over SSMB

3) If A/H changes from 1to 0, AUTO

is disabled and MANUAL activated

OFF has highest priority

4) Already activated with B-UE

AUTO preselected

5) Switch over from AUTO e S S M B only with a change

Subordinate mode

at A/H and a positive going edge again at B-UE

Explanation of other parameters of FB 70lFB 71

Creating Sequencers

Acknowledgement of a timeout (main and sub-sequences)

QIT is only effective when there is a timeout.

is effective, when STO = 1 and transition = 1
QIT
UQIT
is effective, when STO = 1 and transition = X (either 1 or 0)
A timeout in the sub-sequence is cleared by the parameter QIT of the main
sequence.

The Standard Blocks

Monitoring, diagnosis and clearing timeouts

The diagnosis of a sequencer is based on monitoring the current
step number and on the indication of a timeout owing to an
elapsed monitoring time.
With GRAPH 5, diagnosis of errors and remedying them can be
carried out in two ways:
1. Signal states in the parameters of FB 70 and FB 71:
SANZ:
Step display
StAK:
More than one step active
ANZt:
Move on step display SANZ
STO:
General timeout (also FB 72/73)
SSTO:
Displayed step has timeout
ZUST:
Active modes and possible programming errors,
reading out the user DB

2. By using the PG with the status functions and/or GRAPH 5

diagnosis andlor another diagnostic unit.

Signal states of the parameters

Monitoring

With the SANZ parameter (step display) you

can monitor the current step numbers.
If the sequencer moves on in simultaneous
branches, the parameter S t A K indicates that
several steps are active simultaneously. You
can now move the step display on using the
parameter ANZt and display all the current
steps one after the other.

Creating Sequencers

Diagnosis

A timeout is indicated in the parameter STO.

You can bring the step with a timeout into the
SANZ display using ANZ+. The parameter
SSTO (step with timeout) then has signal state
= 1.

The signal states within a step and the next transition can be
monitored using the STATUS display on the PG.

Using the programmer

Status display (monitoring)
With the status display on the PG you can follow the current step
numbers and signal states in the zoom-ins.

Keystrokes

The programmer must be online with the PLC.

Call status SB n using the function keys.

Display of the current step number

Display:
In the overview of the sequencer the current steps are marked
by an inversely displayed "asterisk".
- Below the overview, the numbers of the current steps are listed in a line.
- Steps with a timeout are marked with a broad, red bar.
-

For display of the diagnostic data from GRAPH 5 diagnosis,

refer to Chapter 6.

The Standard Blocks

4.9.2.6

Cold Restart
Function

The parameters are described in Section 4.4.2.1.

To implement the cold restart function for the sequencer, you

must reset the parameter N-ST in a start-up OB of the PLC.
You can only use a flag bit for N-ST that is not used elsewhere
(reason: RLO = 0 at N-ST causes the sequencer to be reset; FB 70
reads and writes to N-ST).
Example 4:
N-ST: F 1.0
Start-up OB:
OB 20
OB 21
OB 22

(S5-135U, S5-150U, S5-155U)

(S5-95U, S5-100U, S5-115U, S5-135U, S5-150U, S5-155U)
(S5-95U, S5-100U, S5-115U, S5-135U, S5-150U, S5-155U)

Selection switch
- selection switch = 0
A I 4.0
= F 2.0
BE
Only software
A F 1.0
R F 2.0 += cold restart active
BE
Parameter in FB 70

+=

cold restart active

Creating Sequencers

Effect of the cold restart function

F 2.0

Restart for
sequencer

" 1 "

yes

"0"

no

RESET
for sequencer

1 no
Yes

1 N-ST not effective 1

N-ST effective

Handling unused functions of function blocks FB 70/FB 71

Remember the following rules:
Supply the input parameters of the standard FBs with RLO = 0.
Output parameters are overwritten and must not be used as input parameters.
- If you have several sequencers in a PLC, you can use the same
flag for all input parameters: exception: N-ST.
The same applies to output parameters.
-

Note
For the parameter N-ST, each sequencer must have its own
flag. This flag must not be used with any other parameter in
FB 70.
Permitted flag area:
F 0.0 - F 199.7
F 206.0 - F 218.7

The Standard Blocks

Example 5
Sequencer 1:
Not used:
N-ST, KEND, SSMB, T t l , MAKT, UQIT, S t A K
FB 70
GPH:HKET
KF+102
1 1.2
11.4
1 1.5
F 2.0
F 1.0
F 1.0

F 2.0
F 1.0
F 218.7

- SBNR
-AUS
-AJH
- B-UE
- N-ST
- KEND
- SSMB

Cold restart flag reserved for SB 102

Flag constantly 0
Output scratchpad flag
All other parameters are used.

UBET
STO
SANZ
SSTO
StAK
ZUST

F 10.0
Q1.1
QW2
Q 1.2
F 218.7
FW 12

Creating Sequencers

Sequencer 2:
Not used:
N-ST, SANW, UQIT
FB 70
GPH:HKET
KF+103 -SBNR
-AUS
-N H
- B-UE
F 2.1 - N-ST
- KEND
- SSMB
-T+1
- MAKT
F 1.0 -SANW
- S-NR
- S-UE
- QIT
F 1.0 - UQIT
- DlAG
-ANZ+

F 2.1
F 1.0

UBET
STO
SANZ
SSTO
S+AK
ZUST

Cold restart flag reserved for SB 103

Flag constantly 0

The Standard Blocks

4.9.3
Additional
Functions
4.9.3.1
FB 75 for
Additional
Functions

The function block FB 75 "GPH: REAK" is used to save and

reactivate waiting and monitoring times, both programmed times
and times still left to run.
The parameters of the previous blocks FB 70 to FB 74 have the
same meaning and effect with FB 75.
When using FB 70, you must link the parameter " N H " in FB 75
with the parameter B-UE of FB 70 so that the times only become
active when the mode is activated.
Programmed times are only saved at the point in time when the
sequencer moves on.
Times still to run are saved until both the parameters A/H and
TIPP are supplied the value RLO = 0.
Times are reactivated when a positive-going signal edge is
detected at the input A/H or TIPP. This applies both to
programmed times and to times still left to run. The parameters
PIR, TW, TM determine how the re-activation is handled.
When reactivating TWRM you have the following options:
only reactivate TW (TM continues to run)
only reactivate TM (TW continues to run) or
- reactivate TW and TM
-

Note
It is possible to overlap the re-activation of TW and TM.
Reactivating the TM timer causes the sequencer timeout to be
cleared.
Exception: time still to run = 0 causes an immediate timeout.

Creating Sequencers

Calling the function block

(only unconditional call possible)

SBNR
AUS

A1H
TIPP
SANW
Pm
TWA
TUE
S-NR
S-UE

Displays and operating elements:

(SBNR)
(AUS, NH, TIPP)
(SANW, S-NR, S-UE)
PIR)

0
FM)

Number of the user sequence block

Modes
Step selection with decade switch
Selection of programmed timesltimes still to run
Waiting times
Monitoring times

The Standard Blocks

Explanation of the
parameters

The parameters SBNR, AUS, AIH, TIPP, SANW, S-NR and S-UE
of FB 75 must be connected with the corresponding parameters of
the sequencer function blocks (FB 70-FB 74) Keep in mind the
special connection possibilities.

Name

Para
type

Data
type

Meaning

Remarks

SBNR

KF

Sequencer

Number of the sequence block to be processed

Note:
The seauence block must be created with GRAPH 5
AUS

B1

I Mode OFF

Evaluation as permanent signal

Effect when AUS = 1:
Saving and reactivating the timer is no longer possible

B1

Mode
AUTOMATIC1
MANUAL

Evaluation as permanent signal

Effect when A/H = 0 + 1:
Timers for TW andlor TM are restarted
Effect when A/H = 1 + 0:
TW and TM times still left to run are saved

TIPP

Mode
EXECUTE

Evaluation as permanent signal

Effect when TIPP = 0 + 1:
Timers for TW andlor TM are restarted
Effect when TIPP = 1 + 0:
TW and TIM times still left to run are saved

SANW

Mode

Evaluation as permanent signal

Condition:
SANW
(step selection)

A/H = 0 and TIPP = 0

With FB 71: connect input with RLO 0

Programmed times l
times still left to run

Evaluation as continuous signal

Effect:
When PIR = 1:
Programmed times can be reactivated
When PIR = 0:
Times still left to run can be activated

Creating Sequencers
Meaning

Remarks

Waiting times

Evaluation as permanent signal

Condition:
W =1

Effect:
Waiting times can be reactivated

B1

Monitoring times

Evaluation as permanent signal

Condition:
TM = 1:

Effect:
Monitoring times can be activated

1 S-NR

Step number

Evaluation in BCD code, 3-digit

Permitted operand is FW (IW, QW, DW, DB X)
With FB 71: connect scratchpad flag word

1 S-UE

B1

Signal for activating

step selection and
delete step

Evaluation with signal change from 0

With FB 71: connect S-UE with RLO = 0

The Standard Blocks

4.9.3.2
Description of the
Modes of FB 75

OFF mode
When the "OFF" mode is set, the block does not save and
reactivate timers.
The timer buffer is deleted.

AUTOMATIC mode (AUS = 0, TIPP = 0)

With a positive signal edge at parameter A/H, the current time
values are reactivated.
With a negative signal edge at A/H, the current time values are
saved.
A/H=O

A/H=l:

re-activation of the timers

with current time values

The parameters Pm, TW, TM determine how the timers are

reactivated.
The modes A/H and TIPP have the same priority and are
interlocked in terms of deletinglresetting and reactivating the
timers.

EXECUTE mode (AUS = 0, A/H = 0)

The reaction is as for AUTOMATIC, however, activated via the
TIPP input.

SANW mode
The parameters SANW and S-UE of FB 75 must be connected to
the same signals as with FB 70174.

Creating Sequencers

When the step number is activated, the programmed time values

are entered and the times left to run are deleted.

Note
This function may only be activated when the user sequence
block is programmed exclusively with l-word binary
commands.

Combination: FB 75 / FB 74 / FB 73 or FB 72
Deselect the current mode
Apply 1 signal to SANW
Specify S-NR (not 0 )
Activate S-UE in FB 74
+=
Search for timer values active
- Apply 0 signal to SANW
- Re-activation of the timers by
AJH=O += A J H = l
or
TIPP = 0 += TIPP=l
- Timers running
-

Note
With a combination of FB 75 and FB 70 the parameter B-UE
must be linked with the parameter A/H or TIPP.

The Standard Blocks

4.9.3.3
Response to a
Timeout

You can influence the response of the command output using data
bits D 33.0 and D 33.1.
Standard assignment
DW 33 KM = 0000 0000 0000 0000

only step flag with timeout off

all step flags off

lI

Simultaneous/linear
sequencer
The step flags (assigned outputs) are switched if there is a
timeout, i.e. command output is active.

If you require a different response, you have two possibilities:

All the step flags can be disabled in the event of a timeout. In
the DB for the sequencer, data bit D 33.0 must be written with
RLO = 1,i.e. the command output is inactive.
Only step flags with a timeout are disabled. In the DB of the
sequencer, data bit D 33.1 must be written with RLO = 1.
With simultaneous sequences, all branches without a timeout
continue as far as the next junction, i.e. command output is active.
You must only apply RLO = 1to one of the two data bits
(D 33.0 or D 33.1).

Creating Sequencers
4.9.3.4

Possible Block
Combinations

Combination of the previous blocks with FB 75

Linear sequences:
FB 75/FB 73 or
FB 75/FB 74/FB 73
Simultaneous sequences:
FB 75/FB 72 or
FB 75/FB 74/FB 72
FB 75/FB 70
FB 75/FB 70/user S B P B 71
FB 75/FB 70/user S B P B 7 5 P B 73

Note
Input parameters of FB 75 which are not used must be
assigned RLO = 0 or a scratchpad flag.

The Standard Blocks

4.9.4

Programming
Examples for
Implementing
Modes
No. 1

Activate signal for AUTO

CSF
F 5.0
AUTOM.
mode
activation
(positive edge)

AUTOM.

1 1.0

STL

In FB 70, this function is implemented with the parameter B-UE.

No. 2

Separating AUTO/HAND in the step zoom-in

AUTO and MANUAL operation

AUTOENAB
Interlock
AUTO

MANENAB
Interlock
MANUAL
Button
Motor ON

+q
PgO
;

Motor ON

The Standard Blocks

Several segments within a step

No. 3

Various program lines:

Step 811

1 F 233.0

Q 5.2

1-

':BE (

7l

Step 812

1 F 233.0

14.1

1- l - [

Continuous program lines:

Step 911
1 F 233.0

l+

Step 912
1 F 199.7

[ l+

step 913

1 4.2

F 199.7

F 199.7

(W

Creating Sequencers
No. 4

Functions independent of a step number

(e.g. setting up)

Not dependent on step number

since F 233.0is not logically linked.

No. 5

Deleting (RESET) the sequences in MANUAL COLD

RESTART on the PLC:

During a cold restart on the PLC, the sequencers goes through a

warm restart in terms of the step number and the mode since the
flag areas are saved in the user DB.
To bring the sequencer to step 0, you must set the sequencers to
OFF in the cold restart OB.
Restart OB:
OB 20 (S5-135U, S5-150U, S5-155U)
OB 21 (S5-95U, S5-100U, S5-115U, S5-135U, S5-150U, S5-155U)
OB 22 (S5-95U, S5-100U, S5-115U, S5-135U, S5-150U, S5-155U)
PBX
:O 1 1.1
:O F11.0
:= F11.2

RESET KEY

.m

F11.2

-AUS

:A F1l.O
:R F 11.0

only for lcycle

remaining program

The Standard Blocks

Sequence end (for a cycle)

No. 6

:A F 233.0
:= F 1.5
Transition does not need to
causes
be programmed
a break. since F 1.5

Tx+2
EB : : ?

SO

etc..
PB X
:O 15.0
:O F 1.5
:= F 2.0

RESET KEY

.m

FB 72/73

If the sequencer is to remain in step SO for several cycles, flag

F 2.0 must be programmed so that it is latching (S F 2.0).

Creating Sequencers
EXECUTE with condition without actions

No. 7
-

FB 72/73 switches the actions through

Without actions the following interlocks are required in the
step:
1 1 . 7 = " 1 1 ' action=O
11.7 = "0" action = 1
I 1.7: Parameter "TIPP" in FB 72/73

Step X

F 233.0

U
general interlocks

Q1.0

:BE (

'
7

The Standard Blocks

No. 811 EXECUTE without condition with actions

2nd possibility: all levels are switched further simultaneously.

a)
b)

Set FB 72/73 to TIPP = 1 ( N H = 0, AUS = 0).

Set FB 74 to TIP0 = 1, TWRM are deleted.
+=withT + l at FB 72/73, all the steps at all levels are
switched further without special programming in the
transition.

No. 812 EXECUTE without condition without actions

Program interlocks in the steps as shown in example No. 7.

Creating Sequencers
EXECUTE with condition with indication of the
satisfied transition

No. 9

The indication is integrated in key T t 1 (e.g. illuminated

push-button). This indicates that pressing the T t 1 key enables the
next step.
The indication is programmed in the transition with a separate
indication for each level. (For all transitions in one level, you can
activate the same output, since the transitions are processed
selectively.)

LEVEL 1
Transition 1

U
Step enabling conditions

1
1

F 233.0
( 1
Q1.0

W
1
:BE

F 233.0
( 1Q1.l

1
1

LEVEL 2
Transition n

Exception

U
Step enabling conditions

:BE

1-

Here, the opening of an alternative branch (several transitions are

processed) must be considered as a further level.

The Standard Blocks

On completion of a simultaneous branch, you must reset the
relevant indicator output, since there is no reset command in the
sequence for this level.
To simplify matters, a program is written before the sequence to
clear all indicator outputs.

Example
PB X with 2 simultaneous branches
:A F x.y
:R Q1.0
:R Q 1 . l

or with 8 simultaneous branches

:L KBO
:T QB 1
.m

.m

FB 72/73

FB 72/73

Creating Sequencers
No. 10 SYNCHRONIZATION with FB 74

Note

For automatic synchronization refer to Chapter 5.

Keystrokes

FB 74 SYN = "1"TW and TM are deleted.

FB 72/73 AUTO (A/H = " 1")
You must program special conditions for synchronization in the
transitions.

Example

12.7

4 SYN

Step enabling conditions in AUTO

12.7

1
( H

F 233.0
1

12.7

H
W
S-

:BE

Conditions for
synchronization
(user-specific)

NOTE
Since AUTO = 1, step output is active.
The actions must therefore be interlocked with
input "SYN" in the steps.

F 233.0

12.7
SYN

Effect

Q5.1

:BE

At the first transition that is not satisfied (RLO = 0) the sequencer

stops.

The Standard Blocks

No. 11 Automatic acknowledgement of a timeout in AUTO

If the sequencer is to continue automatically once the cause of a

timeout is cleared, the QIT signal must be generated
automatically. One possibility would be a pulse generator
connected to the QIT parameter.
PBX
:AN F 11.0
:= F11.0

CYCLE CLOCK PULSE

.m

No. 12 Starting a timer with FB 75 using the QIT signal and AUTO selection

By means of a special interconnection of the parameters, you can

arrange for waiting times and monitoring times to be restarted
after acknowledging a timeout or after AUTO selection.
Example of an FB 72 call
L
T
A
R
AN
S
A
AN

KB
F
F
F
F

0
180 scratchpad flag word
5.0
5.0 flag with RLO = 0
5.1
5.1 flag with RLO = 1

F
F
F
F
F

4.5
6.0
6.1 pulse from QIT signal
4.5
6.0

F W

continued on next page

Creating Sequencers
A
AN
-

F
F
F

10.0 input A/H in FB 72

6.1 pulse from Qit signal
10.7 input A/H in FB 75

NAME:
SBNR
AUS
A/H
TIPP
SANW
PIR
TW
TM
S-NR
S-UE

: GPH:
: KF
:F
:F
:F
:F
:F
:F
:F
:F W
:F

REAK
+l1
9.0
10.7
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.1
5.1
180
5.0

NAME
SBNR
AUS

: GPH:
: KF
:F
:F
:F
:F
:F
:F

SIMl
+l1
9.0
10.0
5.0
5.0
4.5
12.0

A/H
TIPP

T+l
QIT
STO

Example call for FB 70

Condition:
1. pulse QIT signal as for FB 70
2. input A/H in FB 75

A
AN

A
-

F
F
F
F
F

4.5
6.0
6.1
4.5
6.0

QIT FB 70
pulse from QIT signal

here A/H and B-UE of FB 70 must be logically linked

The Standard Blocks

A
A
S
AN
R

F
I
F
F
F

10.0
1.1
10.1
10.0
10.1

NAME:
SBNR
AUS
A/H
TIPP
SANW
PIR
TW
TM
S-NR
S-UE

: GPH:
: KF
:F
:F
:F
:F
:F
:F
:F
:F W
:F

REAK
+l1
9.0
10.7
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.1
5.1
180
5.0

NAME
SBNR
AUS
A/H
B-UE
N-ST

: GPH:
: KF
:F
:F
:I
:F

HKET
+l1
9.0
10.0
1.0
70.0

QIT

:F

4.5

A/H FB 70

B-UE FB 70
A/H FB 70

Important
With further applications, the connection should be
established as explained in this description. FB 75 must
be called unconditionally before FB 70 to FB 74.

Creating Sequencers
No. 13 Edge evaluation using the example of the STO output

Positive edge: evaluated as entering timeout state

auxiliary flag
pulse STO becoming active
( 1 PLC cycle)

Negative edge: evaluated as leaving timeout state

auxiliary flag
pulse STO cleared
( 1 PLC cycle)

The Standard Blocks

N R 14/1Example call FB 73 + FB 74 + FB 75

Search for timer values in SANW and start with AUTOJTIPP

selection
NAME:
SBNR
AUS
A/H
TIPP
SANW
PIR
TW
TM
S-NR
S-UE

NAME
SBNR
TIP0
SANW
SLOE
S-NR
S-UE
SYN

NAME
SBNR
AUS
A/H
TIPP
T+1
QIT
STO

: JU
FB 75
: GPH: REAK

KF + l 0
10.0
10.1
10.2
10.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
12
11.7

identical to SBNR in FB 74 and FB 73

identical to AUS in FB 73
identical to A/H in FB 73
identical to TIPP in FB 73
identical to SANW in FB 74

identical to S-NR in FB 74
identical to S-UE in FB 74

: JU
FB 74
: GPH: ZFKl
:F
:F
:F
:F
:F
:F

KF + l 0
10.3
10.4
10.5
12
11.7
10.6

identical to SBNR in FB 75 and FB 73

identical to SANW in FB 75
identical to S-NR in FB 75
identical to S-UE in FB 75

: JU
FB 73
: GPH: LINl
:F
:F
:F
:F
:F
:F

KF + l 0
10.0
10.1
10.2
11.0
11.4
10.7

identical to SBNR in FB 75 and FB 74

identical to AUS in FB 75
identical to A/H in FB 75
identical to TIPP in FB 75

Creating Sequencers
No. 1412

Example call FB 70 + FB 75

Search for timer values in SANW and start with AUTOJTIPP

selection

NAME
SBNR
AUS

m
TIPP
SANW
PIR
TW
TM
S-NR
S-UE

:A
:A
:S
:AN
:R

F
F
F
F
F

10.1
11.2
108.0
10.1
108.0

logically link FB 70: A/H with B-UE

:A
:A
:S
: AN
:R

F
F
F
F
F

10.2
11.2
108.1
10.2
108.1

logically link FB 70: SSMB with B-UE

FB 75
REAK
KF + l 2
10.0
108.0
108.1
10.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
12
11.3

continued on next page

activate in FB 75: A/H

activate in FB 75: TIPP

identical to SBNR in FB 70
identical to AUS in FB 70
note logic operation above
note logic operation above
identical to SANW in FB 70

identical to S-NR in FB 70
identical to S-UE in FB 70

The Standard Blocks

NAME
SBNR
AUS
A/H
B-UE
N-ST
KEND
SSMB
T+1
MAKT
SANW
S-NR
S-UE
QIT
UQIT
DIAG
UBET
STO
SANZ
ANz+
SSTO
S+AK
ZUST

: JU
FB 70
: GPH: HKET

.F
:F
:F
:F
:F
:F
:F
:F
:F
: FW
:F
:F
:F
:F
:F
:F

:FW
:F
:F
:F
: FW

KF + l 2
10.0
10.1
11.2
70.0
11.1
10.2
11.0
10.7
10.4
12
11.3
11.4
11.5
70.1
70.2
70.3
8
11.6
70.4
70.5
106

identical to SBNR in FB 75
identical to AUS in FB 75
note logic operation above

note logic operation above

identical to SANW in FB 75
identical to S-NR in FB 75
identical to S-UE in FB 75

Creating Sequencers

Example of Planning and Starting Up

4.10 Example of Planning and Starting Up

Task

You want to automate a powder press for producing pellets.

Parts of the press

moveable, upper dye A

moveable mold B
fixed, lower dye C
unit to introduce
material
- unit to remove the
pellet

A
UI)

Die raised

'
'
I
n
rDie lowered

down

down,

M OI I ~lowered
I

Working cycle

C
The operation runs as follows:
When mold B and upper dye A are in their upper positions,
the material can be introduced.
- Once the material has been introduced, dye A is lowered,
compresses the powder in the mold and then returns to its
upper position.
- Mold B is lowered until it reaches its lower position, the
compressed pellet can now be removed.
- The mold then returns to its starting position and a new cycle
can begin.

Creating Sequencers
4.10.1
Planning
4.10.1 .l
Concept Phase

The operation is studied to determine which steps the sequence

can be divided into and what will determine the end of one and
the beginning of the next step (when is the transition?
step
enabling condition, transition).
Steplaction:
7l-ansitionlcondition:

introduce material
material ready?

Steplaction:
7l-ansitionlcondition:

lower dye A
pressing completed?

Steplaction:
7l-ansitionlcondition:

raise dye A
dye A raised?

Steplaction:
7l-ansitionlcondition:

lower mold B
mold B lowered?

Steplaction:
7l-ansitionlcondition:

remove pellet
removal completed?

Steplaction:
7l-ansitionlcondition:

raise mold B
mold B raised?

Example of Planning and Starting Up

The sequence of the steps and transitions can be represented

graphically:
h

l , I Material introduced

- - - - - - - -

T1

Material ready

Lower die

Pressing completed

T2

rn
+

T3

Raise die

Die raised

Lower mold

- - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Mold lowered

T4

Removal completed

I
T6

Raise mold

Mold raised

Fig. 4.1 Sequence of steps and step enabling conditions for the "powder press"

Creating Sequencers
4.10.1.2

Planning on the
Programmer

Based on the created concept, you can now input the graphical
solution to the task as a step-transition structure in GRAPH 5 on
the PG.
- Call GRAPH 5 input:
call the input function with F1 (Input) and F2 (GRAPH 5)
- Fill in the sequence identification screen form, for example as
follows:
D:NONAMEST.S5D

S e q

e n t i a i

FB sei

DB 10

Process synchronization

: No

Synchronization biock no.

: SB 110

(1

LEN =

sequencer identification

SB 10

Data biock occupied

Timer base

FB 70171 for iinearisimuit. sequence : fast vers.

Sequence biock no.

1
1

c o n t r o i

Time base 2

T 10

Lib no

Timer area occupied

T 10

Flag area occupied

F 200.0

Timer, counter occ.

T 0 , C O

Select FB 4

Fig. 4.2 ID screen form for the powder press

Syncsei

Sync no

T 11

- F 255.7

Enter

Cancel

Example of Planning and Starting Up

SEQUENCE BLOCK NO:

SB 10

Specified SB

DATA BLOCK NO:

DB 10

Number of the working DB for the

sequencer. The numbers of the SB
and DB are the same.

FLAG AREA OCC:

F 200.0
- F 255.7

This area is fixed within GRAPH 5

and must not be used anywhere else
within the SB, outside the SB it can
be used as a scratchpad area.

TIMER BASE:

T10

Specifies the same timer location as

the SB for the waiting and
monitoring times.

Creating Sequencers

Inputting the sequencer:

You input the

Example of Planning and Starting Up

Inputting comments
After you have completed the overview, you can add comments to
the steps and transitions. Comments can be entered in both upper
and lower case characters.

S1

: MATERIAL INTRODUCED

T1

: MATERIAL READY ?

S2

: LOWER DIE A

T2

: PRESSING COMPLETED ?

S3

: RAISE DIE A

T3

: DIE A RAISED ?

S4

: LOWER MOLD

T4

: MOLD LOWERED?

S5

: REMOVE PELLET

T5

: PELLET REMOVED?

S6

: RAISE MOLD

T6

: MOLD RAISED ?

SO

: GRAPH5 END

Creating Sequencers

4.10.2
Programming
4.10.2.1
Preparing for
Programming

To implement the sequential control, appropriate sensors,

actuators etc. must be selected and the necessary commands and
feedback messages determined.
In addition to this, other (symbolic) assignments can be made for
manual interventions, releases etc.
The assignment list is stored in a symbols file, example:
Controlling the actuators

Q 3.0
Q 4.0
Q 5.0
Q 7.0
Q 6.0
Q 2.0

:
:
:
:
:
:

Lower die
Raise die
Lower mold
Raise mold
Remove pellet
LED "ready"

Limit positions of the actuators

15.0 -LIMSWlal : Lower die position
16.0 -LIMSWlaO : Upper die position
17.0 -LIMSWlbO : Lower mold position
19.0 -LIMSWlbl : Upper mold position
1 4.0
-ENABLE
: For start of cycle
1 4.1
-EMER OFFIN

AIR o

b o b

-HYDRO/a+
-HYDRO/a-HYDRO/b-HYDRO/b+
-VALVEIF
-DISPLAYL

~I

Example of Planning and Starting Up

OPERAND

SYMBOL

COMMENT

ENABLE
EMEROFFIN
SB lO/QIT
ENABIASl
ENABIBSl
MAN-1
LIMSWIal
ENABIAS2
ENABIBS2
MAN-2
LIMSWIaO
ENABL.03
1NT.M 03
MAN-3
LIMSWIbO
ENABIAS4
ENABIBS4
ENABICS4
MAN-4
ENABL.05
MAN-5
LIMSWIbl
ENABL.06
MAN-6
TIMISB 10
DISPLAYL
HYDROla+
HYDROlaHYDROlbVALVEIN
HYDROlb+
RLO=O
MANENAB

For cycle start

Interlock EMEROFF
SB 10: acknowledge timeout
First enable signal for step 01
Second enable signal for step 01
Console "A" switch insert material
Lower dye position
First enable signal for step 02
Second enable signal for step 02
Console "A" switch lower die
Upper dye position
Enable for step 03
Interlock for manual switch MAN-3
Console "A" switch raise die
Lower mold position
First enable signal for step 04
Second enable signal for step 04
Third enable signal for step 04
Console "B" switch raise die
Enable for step 05
Console "B" switch remove pellet
Upper mold position
Enable for step 06
Console "C" switch raise die
Timeout indication SB 10
"Ready" LED
Lower dye
Raise dye
Lower mold
Remove pellet
Raise mold
Flag constantly "0"
Manual operation - enable in
SB<GS:sequence>
Automatic operation- enable in
SB<GS:sequence>
No. of waiting time level 1
No. of monitoring time level 1
Start call for powder press
EXECUTE BLOCK for GRAPH 5
sequencer
POWDER PRESS program
FB for GRAPH 5 sequencer, linear
POWER PRESS USER DB
Communication DB for diagnosis

F 233.0

AUTOENAB

T 10
T 11
PB 10
SB 3

TW: I 1
TM: I 1
STARWlO
EXECSB3

SB 10
FB 73
DB 10
DB 255

PRESS
GPH:LINl
USRDBI03
DIAGNOS

Creating Sequencers

4.10.2.2

Programming on
the PG

Steps and transitions are programmed at the zoom-in level as

follows:
Program all steps

MATERIAL INTRODUCED

STEP 111

- AUTOISEN
- ENABASI
- ENABIBSI
- MAN-EN fl

STEP 211

- AUTOISEN
- ENABlAS2
- ENABIBS2
- MAN-EN
- ENABIAS2
- ENABlBS2
- MAN-2

LOWER DIE A

y1

STEP 311

- AUTOISEN
- ENABL.03
- MAN-EN

DIE A RAISED

>l

Example of Planning and Starting Up

STEP 411

LOWER MOLD

- AUTOISEN
- ENABlAS4
- ENABlBS4
- ENABlCS4
- MAN-EN
- ENABlAS4
- ENABlBS4
- ENABlCS4
- MAN-4
STEP 511

REMOVE PELLET

- AUTOISEN
- ENABL. 05
- MAN-EN
- ENABL. 05
- MAN-5
STEP 611

- MAN-EN
- ENABL.06
- MAN-6

MOLD RAISED

3
7

- HiDRO/b+
: BE

Creating Sequencers

Program all transitions

TRANSITION 111

MATERIAL READY

TRANSITION 211

PRESSING COMPLETED

- LIMSWlal

AUTOISEN
:BE

TRANSITION 311

DIE RAISED

TRANSITION 411

MOLD LOWERED

AUTOISEN
:BE

- LIMSWlbO

TRANSITION 511

REMOVAL COMPLETED

-1

8.0

TRANSITION 611

AUTOISEN
:BE

MOLD RAISED

The current step flag F 233.0 has been assigned the symbolic
name -AUTO/SEN in this example.

Example of Planning and Starting Up

4.10.2.3

Entering the
Waiting and
Monitoring Times

You assign waiting and monitoring times with F4 (TMJTW). You

can also specify the time using symbols.
Step 2 (LOWER DIE A) has a monitoring time. If the lower
position a1 (pressing completed) is not reached after 5 seconds, a
timeout is signalled.

S 2 : LOWER DIEA

! T2: PRESSING COMPLETED

S 3 : RAISE DIE A

! T3: DIE A RAISED

! S 2 : LOWER DIE A

ID screen

TM: KT 5.2

Search

Half scr

TM-W

Tw

Seg corn

Save

Help

Edit

Enter

Cancel

Zoom-in

Fig. 4.3 Example of step 2 with a monitoring time of 5s

Step 5 (removal) has a waiting time of 3 seconds.

S 4 LOWER MOLD

! T4: MOLD LOWERED

S 5 : REMOVE PELLET

! T5: REMOVAL COMPLETED

! S 5 : REMOVE PELLET

ID screen

Tw 3.2

TM:

Search

Half scr

TM-W

Fig. 4.4 Example of step 5 with a waiting time of 3s

Zoom-in

Seg corn

Save

Help

Edit

Enter

Cancel

Creating Sequencers

4.10.3
Starting Up and
Testing
4.10.3.1
Transferring the
Program

The menu Object - Blocks - Transfer is described in the STEP 5

manual.
Transferring the blocks required for running the sequencer in the
PLC:
For a sequencer, the standard function blocks SB 3 and FB 70 are
required These blocks must be loaded in the PLC.
SB 3

is called at each transition. It executes the modes that

have been transferred to FB 73 as parameters.
FB 73 calls GRAPH 5. It manages the modes and monitors the
sequence.
4.10.3.2
Generating the
Diagnosis DB and
the Working DB

To diagnose sequences loaded in the PLC, a diagnosis DB is

required and is accessed when the DIAGNOSIS function is called.
Each sequencer also requires a working DB (with a number
identical to the SB number). These data blocks are generated with
F1 (Input), F5 @B-GEN); the diagnosis DB is the same for all
sequencers in the PLC. If these data blocks are not generated
directly in the PLC (DBGEN DEVICE: PC) they must be
transferred to the PLC.

Example of Planning and Starting Up

4.10.3.3

Calling FB 73 in
the Program

In OB 1, a program block (PB) is called that in turn calls FB 73

(with JU FB73). The number of the PB must be the same as the
number of the sequence block.
The number of the SB to be called (SB 10) must be transferred to
FB 73 (parameter SBNR).

for example CSF:

Segment 1

Flag constantly 0

: STL
: A RLO=O
: R RLO=O
: XXX

Segment 2

Sequencer powder press

FB 73
GPH:SIMl
KF+lO - SBNR
AUS
EMEROFFINENABLE
-A/H
RLO=O -TIPP
RLO=O -T+1
SB 10/QIT - QIT

STO

- STO/SBlO

Creating Sequencers
4.10.3.4
Testing the
Program
4.10.4
Printing Out the
Program

With the status function, you can test the status of the sequencer
at the overview and zoom-in levels.

If you print out the final program, you obtain the following:

Sequence identification screen

Overview level with all comments
List of all transitions with transition comments
List of all steps with step comments and waiting and
monitoring times TM/TW
- All transitions at the zoom-in level with comments and
assignment lists of the symbols used
- All steps at the zoom-in level with comments and assignment
list of the symbols used
-

Example of Planning and Starting Up

4.10.5

Programming
StepIMSZ
4.10.5.1

Permanent
Processing

The default for processing the steps of a sequencer is permanent.

The whole program of all steps in a sequence block is processed
in each cycle regardless of the current step number.
The following are processed:
- non-active steps, if the RLO=O for F 233.0
- the active steps when the RLO=l for F 233.0

Consequence
If the same output is required in several steps, you cannot
program this with the assignment command (= Q x.y) in every
step.

Reason
The following not yet active step clears the output command
again. As an alternative, you can program an MSZ in this situation.

Possibilities and restrictions with permanent processing

Steps are processed in the AUTOMATIC and MANUAL modes.
Operations not dependent on the RLO (load commands such as
LKH, LKF ... and block calls such as JU PB, JU FB ... etc.) are
processed constantly, i.e. in each cycle.
As an alternative the selective processing of a step is possible.

Creating Sequencers
4.10.5.2

Selective
Processing

Selective steps are only processed when the corresponding step

flag is set. This means that inactive selective steps are skipped
and active selective steps are processed when RLO = 1.

Consequence
Assignments remain set when the sequencer switches further and
must therefore be reset with a separate delete program.

Possibilities and restrictions with selective processing

Operations are only executed when the step is active. Here,
operations not dependent on the RLO can be used e.g. machine
pulse counters or absolute block calls.
In the manual (setting up) mode, the selective step is always
skipped (the step is not active).

Example of Planning and Starting Up

4.10.5.3

Multistep Zoom-In
(M=)

The MSZ is a higher ranking step zoom-in. Logical operations in

an MSZ can be assigned to a selection or to all steps.

Consequence
Outputs which have to be activated several times or identical
logical operations in the steps can be programmed using the MSZ
and assigned to individual steps.
In a special situation, the step zoom-ins remain empty and the
actions with the logic operations are written exclusively in the
MSZ.

Possibilities and restrictions using the MSZ

During processing, the MSZ behaves like a permanent step.
The MSZ is processed following the programmed steps. The
processing order is as follows: S 1, S 2,...Sxxx, SA, SB...SJ
(MSZ).

Creating Sequencers

Example 1

Multistep zoom-in
Q 7.1 active in steps 2, 3 and 5 with the same interlock

Step 41, assigned: S 2, S 3 and S 5

Step zoom-ins S 2, S 3 and S 5 remain empty

Example of Planning and Starting Up

Example 2

Multistep zoom-in
Q 7.1 active in steps 2,3 and 5 with different interlocks
Step 211, assigned: S Q

Step 311, assigned: S Q

Step 511, assigned: S Q

Step 41, assigned: S 2, S 3 and S 5

S 2, S 3, S 5 mixed with S Q.

Process Synchronization

Process Synchronization

5.1

Introduction
If the process control program and the process status are no longer
consistent owing to a timeout or an intervention, both the program
and process must be synchronized before further operation is
possible. With automatic process synchronization, the step of a
linear sequencer can be activated which corresponds to the
process status. If there is an inconsistency, the step from which
operation can be resumed is determined. This is achieved using an
automatic status analysis of the process based on the input and
output states. The following takes place in the program:
for stepltransition pairs, synchronization conditions are
generated automatically (if necessary, these can be added to
manually)
- the process status is detected and
- synchronized to the step.
-

Synchronization
conditions

It is necessary to stipulate the conditions which uniquely identify

the step for continued operation. These conditions are generated
automatically when you select "yes" for process synchronization
in the sequencer identification screen form.
It is possible that the system cannot synchronize using a step with
a timeout, e.g. steps which describe basic settings and in which no
actions are executed. The absence of the action on the other hand
means that there are no synchronization conditions and that there
is not enough information for status recognition. In this case,
supplementary synchronization conditions can be edited manually.

Principle

A positive and a negative synchronization condition is formed for

each step. An active step and an unsatisfied transition result make
synchronization possible.
Positive condition
Negative condition

Synchronization

Introduction
5.1.l

Guide to the
Chapter

Section

Content
Structure of the chapter,
overview of process synchronization
positive and negative synchronization
conditions
multistep zoom-ins
generating synchronization conditions
automatically

5.2

Call strategy

Block interaction and calls,

overview of standard components

5.3

Creating supplementary
conditions on the PG

Defaults
generating synchronization conditions
programming rules
displaying and supplementing
synchronization conditions
Integration in cyclic operation

synchronization in user
program
testing and starting up

l l
5.6

Activating process
synchronization

Functions
SB sync, SB 5 and DW

5.7

Example of process
synchronization page
5-31

Sequence of events, automatically

generated synchronization conditions,
evaluation of automatically generated
and supplementary synchronization
conditions

Process Synchronization
5.1.2

Overview of
Process
Synchronization

The synchronization conditions represent the basis for status

recognition.

Rules

Process synchronization is only possible for sequencers

without simultaneous branches.
- Only assigned outputs are activated automatically from within
the steps.
- Only logically connected inputs are activated from within the
transitions.
- The step before an alternative branch is automatically
synchronized with the left transition.
Logic operations which do not match these rules can, if necessary,
be included in the supplements.

Principle of
dynamic
synchronization

Application: when making a movement, the process will be

synchronized with the corresponding step if the transition is not
satisfied.

Positive condition

Synchronization

Negative condition

Principle of static
synchronization

Application: process synchronization only after the transition is

satisfied (ignoring the actions).

Negative condition
(Transitions of Sx)

Synchronization
(Sx in group of poss.

Introduction
Status recognition

The aim of status recognition is to identify program steps of a

sequencer. The control program specifies which actions of the
process can be activated by the steps of the sequencer.
Process synchronization can only use signals for status recognition
which are exchanged between the process and the control
program. This means that only the signal values of inputs and
outputs can be used. Flags, timers and counters are internal
signals which are not transferred to the process but are only used
to calculate the output signal values in the control program. To
allow signal values to be used for automatic status recognition,
they must meet the following conditions:
1. Signal value dependent on the current process status.
At least two process statuses must exist in which the signal
has a different value.
2. Fixed relationship between the signal value and process status.
There may be several process statuses in which the signal has
the same value, however, within a status, the signal can only
have a specific defined value.
3. Assignment of signal value and process status possible.
If this assignment exists, conclusions about the process status
can be derived from the signal value.

Input, output
signals

Process synchronization uses the values of input and output

signals as information for status recognition. To be able to
determine the assignment of the steps to the sequencer
automatically, synchronization conditions are necessary. These are
generated automatically if "yes" is selected for process
synchronization in the sequencer identification screen form. The
synchronization conditions can, if necessary, be supplemented
manually.
Synchronization conditions are implemented by assigning a
positive and a negative synchronization condition to each step in
the sequencer. Using these conditions, it is possible to determine
whether a step can be active or not.

Process Synchronization

If synchronization is selected in the ID screen form, the positive

and negative synchronization conditions are generated
automatically according to a fixed algorithm, regardless of
whether the programmed input and output signals meet the
conditions above.

Selection algorithm

The selection algorithm functions as follows:

determining the group of possible steps (a)
- reduction of this number @)
- display of single/multiple candidates (Section 5.1.4).
-

a) Determining the
number of steps

A step is marked as a possible synchronization step

candidate when one of its outputs is set.
Here, only genuine assignments (=Qn.m) are taken into account,
and no other output manipulations such as S Q n.m.

b) Reducing the
number of steps

synchronization when either

none of its outputs is set or
all inputs of the following transition are set.

To allow automatic generation of the synchronization conditions,

all the input signals within a transition must form the
automatically generated end condition for the action programmed
in the previous step. Here, only logically linked (A I, 0 I) input
signals are accepted.

Sub-sequences1
further main
sequences

Sub-sequences are treated as further main sequences in process

synchronization. They have their own SB-sync, which must have
a different SB number from that of the main sequence.

Introduction
5.1.3

Synchronization
Conditions

The total number of all synchronization conditions of a sequence

block are put together as a separate block, SB-sync. The
synchronization conditions are structured for each specific step as
follows:
1. Positive synchronization condition,
generated automatically.
2. Negative synchronization condition,
generated automatically.
3. Supplementary, positive synchronization condition,
can be supplemented manually (Section 5.3).
4. Supplementary, negative synchronization condition,
can be supplemented manually. (Section 5.3).

The type of representation of the synchronization conditions at the

zoom-in level is the same as for the steps.
SB-sync must be called by the user (e.g. in OB 1 or in a user PB)
(JU SB-sync). After initiating synchronization, the block is then
run and determines the group of possible synchronization steps.
SB 5 then determines whether a single step is involved and, if it
is, activates the selected step.

Flag 233.1 represents the result of the automatically

generated synchronization conditions.

Process Synchronization
5.1.4

Single Candidate

In the simplest case, if certain rules are adhered to when planning

the sequencer (Section 5.3.3), the automatically generated
synchronization conditions are unique.
Unique means that a synchronization run, whatever the program/
process status, always results in one synchronization step. (The
group of synchronization steps is exactly one step.)
Note: with the automatically generated synchronization
conditions, it is not possible to synchronize with an empty step,
since it has no outputs set.

Multiple candidates

Multiple candidates means that following the synchronization run,

the group of possible synchronization steps includes more than
one step.
Multiple candidates occur with
steps which describe basic settings and in which no actions are
executed
(refer to the example of process synchronization, step 1 and 5).
- multistep zoom-ins (MSZ).
-

Avoiding multiple
candidates

Multiple candidates during status recognition can be avoided by

adding additional information. You can program this additional
information in the supplementary positive and negative
synchronization conditions.
With multistep zoom-ins (MSZ) the supplements must be made in
the corresponding steps, since the positive synchronization
conditions of the MSZ apply to all assigned steps.

Introduction
Positive
synchronization
conditions

Step
F 233.0

-FE

Action

F 233.1

Positive synchronization condition

This condition makes sure that the flag 233.1 used internally for
synchronization is set to 1when the action is active in the step
(value TRUE). If no supplementary positive synchronization
condition was programmed (Section 5 . 3 4 , the step is included in
the group of possible synchronization steps.
A positive condition could appear as follows:
0 action
= F233.1
(The OR before the action is necessary in case several actions are
triggered from within a step. This step is then a candidate for
being the active step when one of the actions is executed.) Instead
of " 0 action" any Boolean operation involving input and output
signals is also possible.

In the methods of representation LAD and CSF, an AND

logic operation is displayed with only one action.

Process Synchronization

Negative
synchronization
condition

1
Transition
End condition

F 233.0

F 233.1

End condition

Negative synchronization condition

This condition ensures that the step is removed from the group of
possible synchronization steps when the end condition is fulfilled
(all inputs of the next transition have the value 1). A negative
condition could be as follows:
A end condition
= F 233.1

Introduction
5.1.5

Multistep Zoom-in

The multistep zoom-in (MSZ) is not directly assigned to any step

in the sequencer. Here, you can program multistep actions and
assign a number of steps to each segment for which these actions
are valid. In addition to this, this MSZ can also be assigned
positive synchronization conditions and supplements.
These synchronization conditions are particularly important for
multistep actions. If, for example, an action is executed in steps Si
and Sj, the status recognition can only detect that Si or Sj is active.

Programming

When programming in the MSZ, the following segment must be

entered:

0 F233.0
= action
The positive synchronization condition for this action appears as
follows:

0 action
= F233.1
For correct status recognition, multistep actions must only appear
in the synchronization conditions of the MSZ. Othenvise, correct
creation of the synchronization conditions is not possible. The
synchronization conditions of the MSZ are assigned to the steps
of the MSZ and take their step assignment from it.

Each MSZ can be assigned a positive synchronization

condition.

Process Synchronization

5.2

Description of the Structure

5.2.1

Call Strategy

Data exchange
Block calls
Generated by LAD 1CSF 1STL PG software (Ed~t0 8 1 PB)
Standard block
Generated by user using GRAPH 5 PG software (Ed~tSB)
Generated by GRAPH 5 PG software (DB-GEN)
Control main sequence
Supplementary modes
T~merhandl~ng
Execute block
Synchron~zat~on
run
Synchron~zat~on
block
User block (transltlons t actlons)
Work~ngDB (DB <G5 sequence>)

1
1

FB 70172173
FB 74
FB 75
SB 01213
SB 5
SB 100+x
SB X
DB X

Description of the Structure

5.2.2

Overview of the
Standard
Components

As can be seen from the call strategy, the following new blocks
are required for synchronization:
the synchronization block SB-sync generated along with the
user SB (one SB-sync per user SB)
SB 5 supplied as a standard block (once per CPU).

Saving
synchronization
conditions

The synchronization conditions are saved separately from the

sequencer in their sequence block (SB-sync), and a separate
SB-sync must exist for each sequencer to be synchronized. This
SB-sync is generated automatically if process synchronization
"yes" was selected in the ID screen form.

Processing SB-sync In the normal automatic mode, the processing of SB-sync is

aborted immediately, which means that the synchronization
conditions only extend the cycle time by a minimum amount.
Process synchronization is only necessary when inconsistencies
between the process status and the control program occur, for
example, as a result of a timeout and manual elimination of the
problem. At this point, you must trigger process synchronization
explicitly. SB-sync can be called by the user OBPB, following
which the standard block SB 5 is called by the SB-sync.
Selection procedure At the beginning of process synchronization, the group of steps
which may become the active step includes all the steps of the
sequencer. After triggering process synchronization, all the
synchronization conditions are checked one after the other
(segments of SB-sync processed). If, during the evaluation, the
positive synchronization conditions provide the value TRUE, the
step belongs in the group of possible synchronization steps.
If the evaluation of the negative synchronization conditions
provides the value TRUE, the corresponding step is removed from
the group.
Synchronization
conditions of an
MS2

Positive synchronization conditions of an MSZ are effective for

all assigned steps in the same way as described above.

Process Synchronization

5.3

Creating Supplementary Conditions on the PG

5.3.1
Defaults

5.3.2
Selecting
Synchronization
Conditions for
Editing

You must select process synchronization in the ID screen form. A

further sequence block (SB-sync) is then automatically generated
from the positive and negative synchronization conditions,
including the supplements. As the default, the sequencer block
number plus 100 is used. An SB number > 154 means that the
number 255 is set as the SB-sync number. With F5 (SB-sync) any
block number > 10 can be set.
For sub-sequences, a synchronization block with its own SB
number must also be specified.

The positive and negative synchronization conditions and

supplements can be selected at the overview and zoom-in level of
a step. Regardless of the currently displayed level, you can obtain
the synchronization level using the function F3 (Search) and
specifying the characters SS and the step number or using the
zoom-in key.

Level

Keystrokes

output or input
mode

Zoom-in level
output mode

enter

F3 (Search)

Characters SSn Return or

enter

I X zoom-in

n = step number

Creating Supplementary Conditions on the PG

Softkeys at the
synchronization
level

F1 (Pos sync)

Change to automatically generated, positive

synchronization condition.

F2 (Pos add)

Change to additional information for the

positive synchronization condition.
Change to automatically generated negative
synchronization condition.
Change to additional information for the
negative synchronization condition.
Return to the zoom-in level.

F3 (Neg sync)
F4 (Neg add)

F8 (Return)

Process Synchronization
5.3.3
Programming
Rules for
Automatic
Generation

When process synchronization is selected, the positive and

negative synchronization conditions are generated during each
translation, this does not, however, include the additional
information which remains unchanged.
The positive and negative synchronization condition for each
step is created automatically.
- If a step contains one or more assignments (= Qn.m), these
(and only these) are ORed into the positive synchronization
condition of this step.
- All inputs of the next transition (and only this transition)
which were programmed directly in the transition are ANDed
into the negative synchronization condition regardless of the
context.
-

End conditions in
the transitions

The end conditions of the actions are required for the negative
synchronization conditions. There are two reasons why an action
is not executed, firstly the action was completed correctly and
secondly the action was aborted owing to an error. The step in
which the action is controlled can, however, only be excluded as a
candidate for the active step when the action was correctly
completed.
For this reason, the end conditions are also relevant for status
recognition. End conditions are input signals and cannot
automatically be distinguished from other input signals, e.g.
enable signals. For this reason, for automatic generation of
synchronization conditions, all the input signals within a transition
are the end condition for the action programmed in the previous
step. Only logically combined input signals are accepted.

Creating Supplementary Conditions on the PG

Multistep zoom-in
(M=)

The positive synchronization condition of the MSZ is valid for the

steps assigned to the MSZ. If the positive synchronization
condition of the MSZ is satisfied when the evaluation takes place,
all the steps assigned to the MSZ remain in the group of possible
candidates.
For an MSZ, only the positive synchronization condition can be
initialized, since there is no follow-on transition which can supply
the end condition for the negative synchronization condition.
Multiple candidates can be avoided by additional negative
synchronization conditions in the steps.

Flag 233.1

Flag F 233.1 represents the result of the automatically generated

synchronization condition (note: both for positive and negative
conditions). Eliminating flag F 233.1 means that the automatically
generated synchronization condition of the corresponding step is
not taken into account in process synchronization, but only the
additional information is evaluated as the synchronization
condition. The deciding factor for the evaluation result of the
positive and negative synchronization conditions is the RLO at the
end of each additional condition.

Process Synchronization
5.3.4

Display of
Automatically
Generated
Synchronization
Conditions
Positive
synchronization
condition

If a step Si has an action and the next transition Ti has an input

(end condition), the automatically generated synchronization
conditions are as follows:

LAD
1

Action

1-

F233.1
l

CSF
Action

--+m-

F 233.1

STL
: 0 Action
: = F 233.1

Step with more

than one output

(h

Si contains several outputs (= Q 1.0, = Q 1.1, = Q 1.2), the

positive synchronization condition then appears as follows:
0 Q 1.0
0 Q 1.1
0 Q 1.2
= F 233.1
For a step with several outputs, the outputs are ORed in the
positive synchronization condition.

Creating Supplementary Conditions on the PG

Negative
synchronization
condition

LAD

1-1

End condition

CSF
End condition

-+m-

1
(k

F233.1
l

F 233.1

STL
: A end condition
: = F 233.1

Transition with
more than one
input

Si has several outputs (= Q 1.0, = Q 1.1, = Q 1.2) and the next

transition has several inputs (1.0, I 1.1), the negative
synchronization condition then appears as follows:
A I 1.0
A I 1.1
= F 233.1
With more than one input in the next transition, the inputs are
ANDed.

Process Synchronization

Displaying the
additional
information
Additional, positive
synchronization
condition

If additional information already exists, this is displayed,

otherwise the following is displayed:

LAD
F233.1

1-1

1
( k

F 233.0
l

CSF
F233.1

F 233.0

STL
: A F 233. 1
: = F 233.0

Additional,
negative
synchronization
condition

The preassignment for the negative synchronization condition is

the same as for the positive synchronization condition.

Creating Supplementary Conditions on the PG

5.3.5

Supplementing
Automatically
Generated
Synchronization
Conditions

For process synchronization, you have an editor available in

which you can display and add information to automatically
generated synchronization conditions. You can edit the additional
information in LAD, CSF or STL. You can call up the
synchronization conditions at the zoom-in level of a step (Section
5.3.2) using the function keys F1 (Pos sync) ... F4 (Neg add).

Editing options

You can manipulate the automatically generated synchronization

conditions in the following ways:

a) The automatically generated synchronization condition is

adequate.
Do not make any additional entry in the screen form for
additional information.

b) You want to extend the automatically generated

synchronization condition.
Enter the required information in the screen form for additional
positive synchronization conditions and OR this with flag 233.1.
In the additional negative synchronization condition, AND flag
233.1.

c) You want to remove inputs/outputs from the automatically

generated synchronization condition.
Since the automatically generated synchronization condition
cannot be modified, you cannot remove inputs/outputs there. It is,
however, possible to remove the interim flag F 233.1 in the screen
form for additional information (refer to Section 5.3.3, flag
233.1). Since the flag F 233.1 represents the result of the
automatically generated synchronization condition, removing this
flag means that the automatically generated synchronization
condition of the corresponding step is not taken into account and
only the additional information you have entered as a
synchronization condition is evaluated.

Process Synchronization

All entries in the LAD, CSF, STL editor are permitted but not all
are useful, for example using timers and counters within the
synchronization conditions, since these are internal signals which
do not provide any information whatsoever for status recognition.
Flags are also only useful in the form of interim flags, since flags
are only valid internally.

Additional
synchronization
conditions

If the sequencer contains basic settings and other steps without

assigned actions, no positive synchronization conditions can be
generated for these steps and they are difficult to identify in the
status recognition, leading to multiple candidates. With empty
steps, the positive synchronization conditions provide the value 0
(false). Quite often, however, there are combinations of signal
values which can be uniquely assigned to these steps, but which
are irrelevant for running the sequencer.
v p i c a l examples of basic settings are manual introduction of
material and manual removal of material. In both steps, no action
is executed, but the sequencer waits until the material is ready or
has been removed. The scan material readylmaterial removed is
made in the next transition.
Only a negative synchronization condition can be generated for
these steps.

Example

Example: excerpt from the example in Section 5.7

Negative synchronization condition, material input
A material
= F 233.1
Negative synchronization condition, material removed
AN material
= F 233.1
The condition "material ready" also applies to all the steps in
which the product is processed apart from material removal.

Creating Supplementary Conditions on the PG

The steps material input and material removal can nevertheless be

assigned unique positive synchronization conditions.

Material input,
additional positive
synchronization
condition

No action of the sequencer is executed:

AN action 1
AN action 2

AN action 3

Limit switch is reached:

A end condition
material not yet ready:
AN material

Material removal,
additional positive
synchronization
condition

No action of the sequencer is executed:

AN action 1
AN action 2

AN action 3

Limit switch is reached:

A end condition
material still ready:
A material
The synchronization conditions specified in this example cannot
be generated automatically. On the other hand, however, the
information is known to the person writing the sequencer program.

Process Synchronization

5.4

Integrating Process Synchronization

To integrate synchronization, additional software is required in the
in the PLC (SB 5), SB-sync must be generated and transferred to
the PLC (ID screen form with process synchronization: "yes"),
and S-sync must be started in OB 1 or PBn.

Integration in the
cyclic program

1. The requirements described in Section 5.3 are met (SB-sync in

the ID screen form).
2. Synchronization block called in OB or PB: JU SBn.
3. Loading the software in the PLC.

If the synchronization conditions are unique, after triggering and

evaluation, the group of synchronization steps only contains the
required step. This step is set manually and you then switch over
to the automatic mode. With a signal change at B-UE, automatic
operation is restarted from this step onwards.

Loading in the PLC

5.5

Loading in the PLC

Transferring the user program to the PLC:
all SBs, FBs, PBs, required with or without synchronization
for running the sequencer and
- SB sync
- SB 5
- modified block (OB or PB) with SB-sync call.
-

5.5.1
Testing and
Starting Up

Here, each sequencer (AUTOMATIC) must be synchronized at

least once with every possible manual operation to be able to
recognize any additions required in the positive or negative
conditions and to implement them.

Process Synchronization

5.6

Activating Process Synchronization

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

5.6.1
Functions

5.6.2
Support by the
Standard SB 5

5.6.3
DBeGB:sequence>

Activate synchronization.
Check synchronization for single candidate.
If single candidate, trigger activation of the step.
Check whether synchronization was successful.
Switch over to automatic after activating the step.
Activate the automatic mode with a signal change at B-UE.

The synchronization conditions are stored segment by segment in

a separate sequence block (SB-sync). The segments are edited so
that flag F 233.0 is replaced by the genuine step flag. At the time
of the synchronization, this SB-sync is called and processed by
the user OBPB. After processing a segment, SB 5 is called which
makes the comparison with the steps still candidates for becoming
the synchronization step.

This block is only loaded in the PLC and cannot be output on the
PG.
The standard SB 5 evaluates the control word DW 33 of
DB<GS:SEQUENCE> and adopts the required synchronization
conditions until the sequencer starts automatically. The required
information is made available by SB-sync.

The possible steps for synchronization are stored in

DB<GS:SEQUENCE> as a bit pattern in DW 231 to DW 238
(KM format), and if there is only one candidate, the selected step
is stored in DW 230 (KF format).
Data word 33 has the following significance for process
synchronization:

Activating Process Synchronization

1. Starting

synchronization

D 33.8
You must set and also reset this bit.
The bit is set: in SB 5 the signal change at D 33.8 is evaluated;
when a pulse is recognized, synchronization is triggered.

The internal synchronization is only active when no

AUTO/TIPP/AUS is selected in the corresponding sequencer.
If you want to activate synchronization constantly in manual
operation, you must change the signal state of D 33.8
cyclically.
2. Display:

single
yes1 no

yes:
D 33.11 = 1
no :
D 33.11 = 0
This bit is set and reset by the SB.
Bit set: the synchronization produced a single candidate.
Bit not set: the synchronization was unable to produce a single
candidate, i.e. more than one step qualified for the
synchronization step, therefore no synchronization is possible.
Triggering D 33.8 completed.

3. Activating
synchronization
(with single step)

D 33.9
You must set and reset this bit.
The bit is set: the condition is that neither AUTOMATIC nor
EXECUTE mode are activated.
Signal change evaluation in SB 5.
The step determined is activated (only if single candidate), and
the sequencer can once again be switched to the automatic mode.

4. Display:

D 33.10
This bit is set and reset by the SB.
Bit set: a single step could be activated and the synchronization
completed successfully. Triggering D 33.9 completed.

step activation
successful

Process Synchronization

Stipulating the
synchronization
procedure

D 33.12
You must set and reset this bit. Depending on the application, you
can select between two synchronization procedures, whereby the
principle shown in the diagrams is applied to each step.
D 33.12 = 0 default: full range of functions of the generated
conditions.
Principle:

Positive condition

Synchronization

Negative condition

Application: during a traversing movement synchronization

should be performed with the corresponding step if the transition
is not satisfied.
D 33.12 = 1 default: full range of functions of the generated
conditions.
Principle:

Negative condition
(Transitions of Sx)

Synchronization
(Sx in group of poss.

Application: synchronization after a satisfied transition (regardless

of the actions).

Activating Process Synchronization

5.6.4

Example of
Handling the Data
Interface

1. Start synchronization

D 33.8 from 0 to 1, evaluation of the positive-going edge

2. The search is only active in one PLC cycle, followed by

display single yeslno
D 33.11 = 1, single : yes
Activation of the synchronization step found
(internally only active if single: yes)
D 33.8 = 1
D 33.9 = from 0 to 1, evaluation of positive-going edge
D 33.10 = 0
D 33.11 = 1
D 33.12= 0

3. Indication of the activation of the synchronization step

successful
D 33.10 = 1 step activated in the sequencer.
Following this the synchronization can be started again at
point 1.Start: D 33.8 and D 33.9 = 0.

Process Synchronization

Process Synchronization Based on an Example

5.7

Process Synchronization Based on an Example

The concept of process synchronization is explained based on an
example. This example is not intended for transfer to a particular
process but is simply intended to illustrate process synchronization.
The functions of an automatic drill can be described by a linear
sequencer.

Initial position (introduce material)

+
+
l

-m

Material ready?
Lower fast

T2

Limit switch lower fast (bl)?

Lower slow

t
t

Bottom limit switch (b2)?

T3
Raise fast
Upper limit switch (h)?
T4

Initial position (remove material)

t T5

Removed?

Process Synchronization

5.7.1
Description of the
Operating
Sequence

5.7.2
Programming
Steps and
Transitions
Step 1: initial
position (introduce
material)

In the initial position, you fix a work piece in the clamp. The drill
is then lowered quickly until it almost meets the work piece (limit
switch bl).
Following this, it is lowered slowly and drills as far as the bottom
limit switch 02).
The drill then returns quickly to the upper limit switch (h). Once
this initial position has been reached again, the work piece can be
removed.

You program the steps and transitions as usual at the zoom-in

level. You can choose the method of representation you prefer, in
the example we are using CSF.
Step 1 is an empty step for introducing material (no actions
programmed, RLO = 0).

????????

Auto enable

Auto enable = F 233.0

Transition 1:
material ready?
Auto enable

Material
Material

= I 1.0

Auto enable = F 233.0

If the material is clamped, the step enabling condition is satisfied.

C79000-68576-C165-01

Process Synchronization Based on an Example

Step 2:
lower fast

Auto enable

Enablel

&
P

Man enable

Enable1

Man switchl

Enable1
Man enable
Man switch1
Lower-fast
Auto enable

Transition 2: limit
switch lower fast?
Limit-switch-b1

> =l

&
P

Lower-fast

= 12.1
= F 205.6
= 13.1

=Q1.1
= F 233.0

Limit-switch-bl= I 1.l
Auto enable

= F 233.0

Auto enable

Process Synchronization

Step 3: lower slow

Auto enable

Man enable
Enable 2
Man switch 2

Lower-slow

Enable 2
Man enable
Man switch 2
Lower-slow
Auto enable

Transition 3:
bottom limit
switch?

Limit-switch-b

= 12.2
= F 205.6
= 13.2

=Q1.2
= F 233.0

Limit-switch-be
Auto enable

1 1.2
= F 233.0

Auto enable

Process Synchronization Based on an Example

Step 4: raise fast

Auto enable

Man enable
Enable 3
Man switch 3

Raise-fast

= 12.3
= F 205.6

Enable 3
Man enable
Man switch 3
Raise-fast
Auto enable

Transition 4: limit
switch top?

Limit-switch-h

= 13.3

=Q1.3
= F 233.0

Limit-switch-h = 1 1.3
Auto enable

= F 233.0

Auto enable

Process Synchronization

Step 5: initial
position
(remove material)

Step 5 is an empty step for removing the material (no actions

programmed, RLO = 0).

????????

Auto enable

Auto enable = F 233.0

Transition 5:
removed?
Material

Material

= I 1.0

Auto enable

Auto enable = F 233.0

If the material has been removed, the step enabling condition is

satisfied.

Process Synchronization Based on an Example

5.7.3

Synchronization
Conditions

For this example, CSF was selected as the method of

representation. You can also select LAD or STL.
With automatic generation, the following positive and negative
synchronization conditions can be created for steps 1to 5:

Step 1:

Step 1 is an initial position, in which no action is programmed

(RLO = 0). The step is eliminated from the results and therefore
no positive synchronization condition can be generated for S1.

Negative
synchronization
condition

A negative synchronization condition is possible due to the input

in T1.

Material

F 233.1

Process Synchronization

Step 2:
positive
synchronization
condition

Negative
synchronization
condition

Step 3:
positive
synchronization
condition

Negative
synchronization
condition

Process Synchronization Based on an Example

Step 4:
positive
synchronization
condition

Negative
synchronization
condition

Process Synchronization

Step 5:

Step 5 is an initial position, with no action programmed in its

zoom-in. No positive synchronization condition can therefore be
generated for S5.

Positive
synchronization
condition

Negative
synchronization
condition

A negative synchronization condition is possible due to the input

in T5.

Material

+Tkm

F 233.1

Process Synchronization Based on an Example

5.7.4
Evaluation of
Automatically
Generated
Synchronization
Conditions

At the beginning of status recognition, all steps 1to 5 are

included in the group of possible synchronization steps.

Case 1,
step 2:
lower fast

The drill is in the "S2 lower-fast" phase.

At the time of the status recognition, the drill is moving down fast
and is located between the two limit switches h and bl.
The positive synchronization condition of step 2 is satisfied. This
means that all steps except S2 are removed from the group of
possible synchronization steps. When limit switch-bl is reached,
S2 is also removed from this group. If limit switch-bl is not
reached, S2 remains in the group.

Case 2,
step 3:
lower slow

The drill is in the "S3 lower-slow" phase.

At the time of the status recognition, the drill is moving down
slowly and is located between the two limit switches b l and b2.
This case is analogous to case 1. Only the positive
synchronization condition of step 3 is satisfied. Synchronization is
then only possible at all using step 3.

Case 3,
step 4:
raise fast

The drill is in the "S4 raise-fast" phase.

At the time of the status recognition, the drill is moving up fast
and is located between the two limit switches b2 and h.
This case is analogous to case 1. Only the positive
synchronization condition of step 4 is satisfied.

Process Synchronization

Case 4,
step 1:
introduce material

The drill is in the initial position

"S1 introduce material" .
At the time of the status recognition, the drill is not moving and is
located at the upper limit switch h, while the operator clamps a
work piece in position, i.e. I 1.0 = 0 is still set.
This fact leads to multiple candidates during status recognition.
Since only the negative synchronization conditions of steps 4 and
5 are satisfied, only these are removed from the group of possible
synchronization steps.
After evaluation of all the synchronization conditions, steps 1, 2
and 3 remain in the group of possible synchronization steps and
synchronization is not possible.

Case 5,
step 5:
remove material

The drill is in the initial position

"S5 remove material".
At the time of the status recognition, the drill is not moving and is
located at the upper limit switch h, while the operator removes the
work piece in position, i.e. I 1.0 = 0 is still set.
This also leads to multiple candidates in status recognition. Since
only the negative synchronization conditions of steps 4 and 1 are
satisfied, only these are removed from the group of possible
synchronization steps.
After evaluation of all the synchronization conditions, steps 2, 3
and 5 are still in the group of possible synchronization steps and
synchronization is not possible.

Process Synchronization Based on an Example

5.7.5

Restricting Multiple
Candidates using
Additional
Information

This example illustrates that process synchronization with

automatically generated synchronization conditions functions for
all steps which have an output (= an action) assigned. All the
other steps (in the example the initial positions S1 and S5) cannot
be identified on the basis of the automatically generated
synchronization conditions.
Owing to the absence of an output, no positive synchronization
conditions could be generated automatically for the initial
positions S1 and SS.-When writing the seq;encer, on the other
hand, you can edit these conditions and add additional information.
Procedure
1. Steps and transitions are programmed (Section 5.7.2).
2. The synchronization conditions are generated automatically
when the sequencer is translated (Section 5.7.3).
3. Add information to the positive and negative synchronization
conditions at the zoom-in level.

Positive
synchronization
condition

The synchronization conditions have the following significance:

when none of the actions
lower-fast,
lower-slow and
raise-fast is being executed
the material is not yet in position and
the drill is located at the upper limit,
then step 1 "initial position introduce material" is active.

Negative
synchronization
condition

This step is not active when the material has been inserted
(automatically generated synchronization condition), one of the
actions
- lower-fast,
- lower-slow or
- raise-fast is being executed or
- the drill is not located at upper limit switch h.

Process Synchronization

Step 1

The synchronization conditions of the initial position S1 could

appear as follows:

Positive
synchronization
condition

The positive synchronization condition is empty.

Additional
information for
positive
synchronization
condition

The automatically generated synchronization condition is empty,

for this reason interim flag F 233.1 is ignored.

Lower-fast
Lower-slow
Raise-fast
Material
Limit-switch-h

Auto enable

Process Synchronization Based on an Example

Negative
synchronization
condition

Automatically generated synchronization condition.

Material

Additional
information for
negative
synchronization
condition

F 233.1

The interim flag F 233.1 is used here since an automatically

generated, negative synchronization condition exists which is
supplemented by additional information.

F233.1
Lower-fast
Lower-slow
Raise-fast
Limit-switch-h

Auto enable

Process Synchronization

Step 5

Analogous to step 1, the following segments result:

Additional
information for
positive
synchronization
condition

The automatically generated synchronization condition is empty,

for this reason interim flag F 233.1 is ignored.

Lower-fast

' &

Lower-slow

Raise-fast

Material
Limit-switch-h

Negative
synchronization
condition

Auto enable

Automatically generated synchronization condition.

Material

Additional
information for
negative
synchronization
condition

+Tkm

F 233.1

F 233.1

Lower-fast
Lower-slow
Raise-fast
Limit-switch-h

Auto enable

Process Synchronization Based on an Example

Evaluation of the
additional
synchronization
conditions

Since the synchronization conditions in Section 5.7.5 were only

extended by the conditions for steps 1 and 5, cases 1, 2 and 3 no
longer need to be taken into account since the status recognition
in Section 5.7.4 already produced a correct result.

Re: case 4,
step 1:
introduce material

The current status "initial position introduce material", i.e. at the

time of process synchronization, the drill is not moving and is
located at upper limit switch h, while the operator clamps a work
piece.
The positive synchronization condition of step 1 is satisfied and
identifies S 1 as the synchronization step. The negative
synchronization condition of S5 is also satisfied and would
eliminate S5 from the group of possible synchronization steps if it
was still contained. All other synchronization conditions are
unsatisfied and do not affect the group of possible synchronization
steps, the step searched for could nevertheless be uniquely
identified.

Re: case 5,
step 5:
remove material

Current status "initial position remove material", i.e. at the time of

process synchronization, the drill is not moving and is located at
the upper limit switch h, while the operator removes the work
piece.
This case is analogous to case 4. The negative synchronization
condition of S 1 is satisfied and removes S 1 from the group of
possible synchronization steps. In addition to this, the positive
synchronization condition of S5 is satisfied and removes all steps
except S5 from the group of possible synchronization steps and
therefore identifies S5 as the synchronization step.

GRAPH 5 Diagnosis

GRAPH 5 Diagnosis

6.1

Introduction
The software package GRAPH 5 diagnosis allows the diagnosis
and documentation of timeouts in sequential control systems.
The new feature of the diagnostic functions is the analysis of the
part of a sequencer with a timeout (stepltransition) on the PLC
and the output of messages on the PG or printer.

Interaction
between hardware
and software

Process
user program
GRAPH 5: FB 70-75, DB

Timeout message

Introduction

6.1.l

Difference
between GRAPH 5
Diagnosis, Stage V
and VI

The software package GRAPH 5 diagnosis (G5-DIAG) replaces

and extends the old GRAPH 5 diagnosis function.

The most important differences:

Stage V

Stage V1

Diagnosis only with sequencers

FB 70171.

Diagnosis with all sequencers

FB 70 to FB 74.

Sequencer with timeout called

using function key F6 (Diagnosis).

Sequencers with timeout

selectable via the user interface
and screen forms.

No automatic printout of messages. Automatic printout of messages

with date and time.

New features

1 Per PG and active user program, four CPUs can be monitored.

The analysis of the section of a sequencer with a timeout is new. The

error criteria can be output with symbol names and comments.
A new software operating field on the PG allows you to set the
sequencer modes and acknowledge errors.

1 The diagnosis is monitored and organized by a function block (FB 69). 1

GRAPH 5 Diagnosis

6.1.2

Guide to the
Chapter

GRAPH 5 diagnosis comes in 2 software packages: the SW for

the PG for editing and operator input and the standard FBs and
DBs for running diagnosis on the PLC. For this reason, the main
part of the chapter is divided into 4 sections (Sections 6.2 to 6.5).

Section

Content

Introduction

Software differences Stage V and V1

Overview of diagnosis
Single, group diagnosis
Criteria analysis
Hardware and software configuration

Understanding the
diagnostic program

Program execution on the PLC

Blocks on the PLC
Structures on the PLC
Operation on the PLC

PLC
Preparing the
diagnostic program

PG
Transferring and
testing the diag, prog.

Defaults for diagnosis

Editing the parameter data DB
Integration of the user program
Loading in the PLC
Test and starting up

PG-PLC
Using diagnosis

PG

User interface, selectable functions on

the PG
Basic functions for diagnosis on the PG
Overview of the basic functions on PG
Group diagnosis
Sequencer overview
Sequencer diagnosis
Criteria analysis
Input field

Example of
GRAPH 5 Diagnosis

Additions to the powder press example

Detailed description
of the FB

Detailed information (for users wanting

to use the interface for their own
diagnostic units).

Introduction

6.1.3
Overview of
Diagnosis

The diagnostic functions on the PLC permanently monitor all the

sequencers and the diagnostic information is buffered. The PG can
then access this information.

Functions

For diagnosis of sequencers in one or more PLCs (max. 4 CPUs)

there are three functions available:
1. SB list provides a sequencer overview and detailed
information about a block.
The SB list function outputs the status of the sequencers on
the selected PLC. An SB indicated in the overview can be
further investigated if there is a timeout (criteria analysis).
Output on screen or printer.
2. Messages
The messages function outputs detailed timeout messages of
all SBs being monitored on the screen or printer. An SB
indicated in the overview can be further investigated if there is
a timeout (criteria analysis).
3. Software input field
You can assign parameters for the programlcall interface of the
FBs (FB 70 to FB 74) using a software input field.

Blocks

These diagnostic functions are supported by standard blocks on

the PLC:
1. Function blocks:
FB 69 Diagnosis (standard FB)
FB 67 Read data (standard FB)
FB 68 Write data (standard FB)
2. Data blocks:
DB <GS>DIAG> Diagnosis DB
(generated automatically with DB-GEN)
Data buffer DB
DB <DIAG>
(temporarily set up by FB 69 on the PLC)
DB <GS:PARA> Parameter data DB
(to be created by the user)

GRAPH 5 Diagnosis

Software packages

GRAPH 5 diagnosis is based on the interaction between two

software packages:
1. PLC:
2. PG:

standard blocks on the PLC: FB 67 to FB 69

GRAPH 5 diagnosis on the PG: G5-DIAG

Diagnostic data

The diagnostic data are saved in a data buffer on the PLC (max.
4000 words long) to allow them to be called by the PG.

Criteria analysis

The most important innovation in the diagnostic functions is the

analysis of a part of a sequencer with a timeout (stepltransition)
on the PLC. An analysis is made to find out why an action was
not executed.
Non-satisfied assignments and the corresponding conditions
(criteria) are saved. This is known as criteria analysis.
The data of the individual sequencers are prepared for criteria
analysis and buffered in the data buffer DB.
GRAPH 5 diagnosis distinguishes between initial value messages
and the current timeout status.
The initial value reflects the situation as it is after a block is run
through in the cycle in which the timeout occurred the first time.
The current timeout status (current or refresh value) reflects the
situation in terms of changes that have taken place since the first
occurrence.
Using the criteria analysis function, you can display error criteria
directly on the PG with symbol names and comments.

Changes occurring between the type of error and the SB end

(when running through parameter steps) cannot be detected
by GRAPH 5 diagnosis. This may mean that the analysis
results are misleading.

Introduction

6.1.4

Single Diagnosis

Single diagnosis means that the sequencer of a PLC is monitored,

timeouts diagnosed and indicated.

PLC
-

CPU

Process
V)

Timeout
06 PE, SE, FB
GRAPH 5 with
Diagnosis
Data blocks

Message

- p G q

GRAPH 5 Diagnosis

6.1.5

Group Diagnosis

The difference between single and group diagnosis is that in

group diagnosis, up to four PLCs can be monitored
simultaneously and in single diagnosis only one PLC. In group
diagnosis, the PG is connected with the PLC via a bus.

PLC

LW

I
zV)

Process

PLC

Timeout

Introduction

6.1.6
Hardware and
Software
Configuration

GRAPH 5 diagnosis is based on the sequencer information in the

working data block and sequencer block.

The following expansions are required for this:

MS-DOS >= V5.0 or FlexOS >= V2.3

PG 7xx (with SS-DOS basic packages and GRAPH 5 >= V6.0)

Expansions:
G5-Diag package >= V6.0
with mode selection
group and single diagnosis
and criteria analysis

PLC

SlNEC H1
SlNEC L2
AS 511

(with GRAPH 5 software

SBx, DBx, standard FBs and SBs)

Expansions:
Standard blocks
Diagnostic DB
Data buffer DB
Parameter data DB

FB 67 to 69
DB<GS:DIAG> (generated with DB-GEN)
DB<DIAG> (gen. temporarily by FB 69)
DB<GS:PARA> (edited by user)

The following are permitted:

S5-100
CPU 103
S5-115U CPU 941 - 944
CPU 944 A: release PLC software >=Z03
S5-135U CPU 922lCPU 928
S5-15OU CPU 924 - 927
S5-155U CPU 922lCPU 928
CPU 946-3UA23 or higher1CPU 947
To reduce the cycle time and memory requirements, the
CPU 944192819461947 or S5-150U are recommended.

GRAPH 5 Diagnosis

Software
configuration

The following diagram represents standard diagnosis with the

required software in the PLC.

GRAPH 5: sequential control

1 GRAPH 5 diagnosis
1 Standard blocks FB 67-FB 69

1
1

DB<GS:DIAG>,
DB<DIAG> (temporary)
DB<G5:PARA>

For sequential control, you require the standard blocks. From the
following combinations of standard blocks, select the optimum
combination for yourself (listing according to priority: minimum
cycle time and memory requirements):

1.

FB 73 and SB 3

Linear sequences

2.

FB 72 and SB 2

Linear sequences and simultaneous

sequences

3.

FB 70 (71) and SB 0

Linear sequences, simultaneous

sequences and sub-sequences

You can extend the functions of these basic combinations using

additional blocks such as FB 74/75 (see also Chapter 4).
GRAPH 5 diagnosis in the PLC (FB 67 to 69) prepares the data
and communicates with the PG software G5-DIAG.

Understanding the Diagnostic Program

Understanding the Diagnostic Program

6.2
6.2.1

Program
Execution on the
PLC

JU PE, caii
sequencer with
FE 70 to FE 75

JU PE, caii
GRAPH 5 Diagnosis
with FE 69

Start-up OB

GRAPH 5 Diagnosis

6.2.2
Blocks on the PLC

In addition to the GRAPH 5 blocks (SB, FB 70 to FB 75, the user

DB, SB-execute) the following are also required.

FB 69 Diagnosis

FB 69 consists of executable program and an operation and

monitoring section.
This block must be transferred along with the selected DB
<GS:PARA> and integrated in cyclic program execution.

FB 67 Read data

FB 67 is called by FB 69 and is responsible for the correct entry

of a message from the DB<DIAG> to DB<GS:DIAG>.
This block only needs to be transferred to the PLC.

FB 68 Write data

FB 68 is called by FB 69 and is responsible for the correct entry

of a message from DB<GS:DIAG> to DB<DIAG>.
This block only needs to be transferred to the PLC.

Diagnostic DB

This block is the GRAPH 5 diagnostic data block for analysis of

criteria. It is generated with the PG function DB-GEN.

Data buffer DB

This DB is used as a data buffer (FIFO principle), until a PG

reads the information. It is generated by FB 69 with the DB
number of the diagnostic DB + 1.The length of the DB depends
on the number of entries in the parameter data DB.
Note: this DB number must be kept free.

Parameter data DB

This DB contains 20 DWs with parameter data. You must edit this
DB. The default assignments can be found in Section 6.3 and in
Section 7.3.

Understanding the Diagnostic Program

6.2.3
Structures on the
PLC

PG 7xx

GRAPH 5 Diagnosis: G5-DIAG package

DB <G5: DIAG>
Basic assignment by
PG function "DBGEN"

1 Buffer of a dynamic

message for display on

the PG

for entry in DB <DIAG>

DB <DIAG>
Data buffer for
messages according
to "FIFO" principle
(generated
automatically in start-up
FB 69, max. 4000
words long

- Selection and display of the modes of a selected sequence

- Editing of criteria analysis data in messages
Sequential control system with e.g.: FB 72/SB 2
SB <G5: sequence >

DB <G5: sequence >

Sequence
data

l1 1

tT2

1 SB per sequencer

1 DB per sequencer
(from PG function DB-GEN)

The data for criteria analysis are edited in messages with a field
length of 30 DW (fixed).

II

GRAPH 5 Diagnosis

6.2.4

Mode of Operation
on the PLC

GRAPH 5 diagnosis is an integral part of a GRAPH 5 sequencer

on a PLC (CPU). The interface between a sequencer and
GRAPH 5 diagnosis is represented by the user DB and the
diagnosis DB.
The organization and monitoring of GRAPH 5 diagnosis on the
PLC is handled by FB 69.
The standard software on the PLC (FB 67 to FB 69) uses existing
sequencer data and stores the individual criteria (statuses) of the
steps, MSZs and transitions in a data buffer DB (DB<DIAG>).
The secondary functions "read data" (FB 67) and "write data"
(FB 68) are monitored and assigned parameters by FB 69.
FB 69 is divided into two major sections, the start-up section and
the operating and monitoring section (diagnostic section).
The diagnostic section only becomes active, however, when the
start-up section is completed without an error.
The parameter data for start-up and the cyclic section (e.g.
start-up OB, max. number of timeouts, max. number of entries in
the diagnostic DB etc.) are stored in a parameter data DB
@B <GS:PARA>).

Note
The GRAPH 5 sequencer also functions without the standard
software for GRAPH 5 diagnosis (FB 67 to FB 69, data
buffer DB and parameter data DB), since the interface is
implemented by DBs (see above).

Preparing the Diagnostic Program

Preparing the Diagnostic Program

6.3

To allow the diagnostic program to run as an integral part of the

GRAPH 5 program, you must make the following preparations.
Defaults for diagnosis
- Edit parameter data
- Integrate the diagnostic program in the user program
-

6.3.1
Defaults

With the DB-GEN, the diagnostic DB can be assigned the

maximum number 254, since the number of the data buffer DB
@B<DIAG>) = the number of the diagnostic DB plus 1
@B<G5: DIAG>).
The DB number must therefore be kept free.

6.3.2
Editing the
Parameter Data DB

~ ~0 ~0

The block length is 20 DWs. For defaults, see also Section 7.3.

Range

Meaning

Meaning

ti:

1 free

max. number of
timeouts/cycle

1 KF 1to255

64

max. criteria per SIT

1 KY xxx.xxx

node no../CPU no.

00

0 00 gm;;x.mber
2000

zi767
KF 1to 135

1 KF 1to 134

1 KF 30, fix
1 KF 1to 255
KHO

30

KF1t050

no. of cycles for sign of life

of entries DB-

first field in DB-DIAG

field length for DB-DIAG

1 PLC start up ID: OB-no.

not used at present

0
0

0 C H 0
11

KH 0

12

KH 0

3 C H 0
14

KH 0

15

KH 0

16

KH 0

1 not used at oresent

not used at present

1 not used at present

1

1 not used at oresent

0
0

internal data
internal data

1 internal data

17

KH 0

18

KH 0

1 internal data
1 internal data

19

KH 0

internal data

GRAPH 5 Diagnosis

6.3.3
Integration in the
User Program

To allow the diagnostic program to run on the PLC, three actions

are necessary.
1. Call FB 69 in OB 1 or PB.
2. Call the parameter data DB for the start-up section and
transfer the start-up OB number to DW 8.
3. Call FB 69 in OB 1, PB or FB for the cyclic program section
and assign the number of the parameter DB.

1. Calling FB 69 in OB 1 or PB.
FB 69 has only one form of operand for the parameter data DB
(P-).
FB 69 is called after the sequencer FB.
Example:
: JU FB (70 to 73)
then
: JU FB 69
Name : G5:DIAG
PARA :
DB 111
: BE

(parameter data DB)

To ensure that the start-up section is constantly in the test routine,

you must integrate the following program section in OB 1 or the
PB before calling FB 69.

The reason for this is that the start-up section is constantly in the
test routine which means that changes in the sequencers or data of
the corresponding data blocks are immediately entered in
GRAPH 5 diagnosis.

Preparing the Diagnostic Program

2. Start-up section
Integration in the start-up OB 20 to 22 (depending on the specific
PLC).
C DB<GS:PARA> data block for parameter assignment on the PG
L KF<OB-Nr.>
TDW8

3. Cyclic section
Integration in the cyclic program execution (following the
sequencers):
Assignment of DB<GS:PARA> on the PG
- Call in OB 1 or PB X or FB X
-

JU FB 69
NAME: G5:DIAG
PARA: DB<GS:PARA>

Note
S5-135U CPU 9221928
If a start-up error @B<GS:DIAG> D162.3) is caused by
there being too little free RAM and if the error remains
despite compressing, DW 17 in DB<GS:PARA> must have
the value KH 0000 written to it once.
If a start-up error still occurs after compressing
@B<GS:DIAG> D 162.3), the RAM area is not large
enough.

GRAPH 5 Diagnosis

6.4

Transferring and Testing the Diagnostic Program

The diagnostic program is transferred to the PLC and tested in
much the same way as the GRAPH 5 program, since it is a
component of GRAPH 5.

6.4.1
Loading on the
PLC

Transferring blocks to the PLC

FB 67 to FB 69, DB<GS:PARA>, DB<GS:DIAG>,
OB 1, PB x,FB X, OB 20-22 (for the specific PLC) to the PLC.

6.4.2
Test and Start-up

Start up your sequencer(s) on the PLC and check that it or they

function correctly.

Working with Diagnosis on the PG

6.5

Working with Diagnosis on the PG

For diagnosis and display of messages for sequencers on the PG
or output on a printer, you must select the user interface for
GRAPH 5 diagnosis.
Click on "Change" and "G5-DIAG" in the STEP 5 or GRAPH 5
main menu.

6.5.1

User Interface,
Selectable
Functions on the
PC:

Obiect

Editor

PLC function

DB screen form >

Diagnosis I

Manaaement

Generate XRF
EPROMs
Rewire >
Assignment lists >
Select drive
Bus paths
DB-GEN in the program file
DB-GEN in PLC

Chanae

GRAPH 5

- Single diagnosis Output PLC info >

SB list
Messages

- Group diagnosis SB list

Messages
W/Omessage printer
with message printer

Hel~
I

GRAPH 5 Diagnosis
6.5.2

Basic Functions
for Diagnosis on
the PG
Management

Change

W/Omessage printer
with message printer

W/Omessage printer
with message printer

1
Configuration editor

SIMATICS~IPEGO~

Generating a configuration file for GRAPH 5 . group

Conllg I e ' O NONMEKO N I

dagnosis

P a h l l l b O NONAMCAP N I

Messages

The main functions of GRAPH 5 diagnosis includes the recording

of step sequences with a timeout, recording the date and time, the
analysis of the timeouts and their causes (criteria). Various screen
forms can be selected for display on the screen or for printing out.
-

SB list (step sequence overview),

messages (step sequence diagnosis),

and selection of criteria analysis for both together.

Operating screen
form

From the three screen forms, step sequence overview, step

sequence diagnosis and criteria analysis, you can call the
operating screen form using F1 (New par).

Working with Diagnosis on the PG

6.5.3
Overview of the
Main Functions on
the PG

Single diagnosis

Group diagnosis

Configuration editor

Login group diagnosis

Step sequence overview

1 (New par) -+

Operating screen

l l

Step sequence diagnosis

1 (New par)

,
Operating screen
l

2. F3 (Analysis)
3. Select step, MSZ, transition
4. Enter key or return

r
Criteria analysis

\ F1 (New par)

Operating screen

6.5.4

Group Diagnosis

If you want to monitor the step sequences in several PLCs, you

must first inform the PLC of the connections (path, path name).
You edit this connection in the configuration editor and store it in
the configuration file. Following activation, the PG sets up the
connection and indicates this in the screen form "Login group
diagnosis".

Configuration editor

After clicking on the menu items "Group diagnosis", "SB list" or

"Messages" the "Configuration editorUscreenform is opened.
Here, you can specify up to four path names for links to the PLC
which you want to monitor simultaneously.
In the configuration editor screen form, specify the name of the
configuration file. The four paths must all be in the same path file
(entered in bus selection). The path file from the project setting is
used first as the path file.

SlMATlC S5 / PEG02

Configuration editor

Generating a configuration file for GRAPH-5 - group diagnosis:

Config. file : C: NONAMEKD.INI

Pathname

1:

Pathname

2:

Pathname

3:

Pathname

4:

Select

Path file : D : NONAMEAP.INI

Save

lnfo

Softkeys are described on page 6-24.

6 - 22

Enter

8 Cancel

Working with Diagnosis on the PG

Logging in for
group diagnosis

The PG attempts to create a connection to the PLC specified in

the configuration file.
Connection established
Connection not established

Only some connections

established

Login

- group diagnosis

Configuration : Group

Path

F
1

Indicated by an asterisk under Ackn.

If the connection cannot be
established, the text "connection not
correct" is displayed.
If only some of the connections were
established, you must acknowledge
whether you want to change the
setting or whether the PLCs for
which a connection has been
established have been monitored.

Plant

PLC2

PLC6

3
4

PLC9

S5 / PEG02

SIMATIC
Config. file :

C:NONAMEKD.INI

Path file :

C:NONAMEAP.INI

Error request

Ackn.

C3
Connection not correct

C3
C3

PLC4

F
2

F
F
3 Select 4

F
5 Save

F
6

Softkeys are described on page 6-24.

lnfo

F
7 Enter

F
8 Cancel

GRAPH 5 Diagnosis
If no connection was established, GRAPH 5 returns to the basic
menu.
If the connections are established you change
to the "step sequence overview" screen form if you selected
SB list,
- to the "step sequence diagnosis" screen form if you selected
messages.
-

If all the connections were established successfully, you can also

use all the softkeys.

Softkeys

Applies for both screen forms "configuration editor" and "login

group diagnosis".

F3 Select

F5 Save
F6 Info
F7 Enter
F8 Cancel

Select existing files using the selection window

(only allowed in the input fields config. file
and path file). This does not function with path
names.
Save the file. Entry of the configuration data in
the configuration file.
Informs you about the selected input field.
Save the configuration file and execute the
function SB list or Current messages.
Return to function selection.

Working with Diagnosis on the PG

6.5.5

Step Sequence
Overview

The "step sequence overview" screen form displays the existing

sequence blocks on the monitored PLC. The screen form has two
modes:
1. Display mode (polling mode) with cyclic polling. This
displays detailed information about the marked sequence
block. The only softkey available is F1 (Inp mode) to change
to the input mode. A step with a timeout is indicated by a
white asterisk on a red background.
2. Input mode for selecting various displays and changing to the
operating screen form. This allows you to select one of the
displayed SBs and to analyse it using the function keys. In this
mode there is no updating of the message.

Step sequence
overview screen
form in input mode
(Step
Path:

sequence overview
Path name1 (mm. 19 C)

init value:

Mode:

SB:
AUTO

Number of timeouts: 1

Selected:

27
Date:

SB-comment-on-SB27
07.10.1993

Steps:

Transitions:

4
l

6:12

B
l

S3
Step comment
Path name
Pathnamel-(mm. 19 C)
Pathnamel-(mm.
Pathnamel-(mm.
Pathnamel-(mm.
Pathnamel-(mm.
Pathname2

IF

Time:

1 New par 2

19 C)
19 C)
19 C)
19 C)

Group timeout

SB COMMENT

MODE

S8

SB comment on SB 27
Comment-on-S832

AUTO
OFF
MAN
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
MAN
MAN

27
32
57
62
99
12

SB-57-comment
SB-99

F
F
F
F
F
Status 3Analysis 4 Ist tmout 5 Poll mode6Cur tmoun

ST

F Help
8 Cancel

GRAPH 5 Diagnosis

Information about
the screen form

The following information is displayed for each of these sequence

blocks:
a consecutive number,
the path name of the PLC,
- the comment from the assignment list,
-

the SB number,
- the mode and
- an ID indicating whether the SB has a timeout or not.
-

The selected SB is marked by an inverse bar. If there is a message

in the message buffer for this SB, this is displayed at the top edge
of the screen. Any function keys you press relate to the selected
SB. The timeouts are detected and updated in the polling mode by
reading out the DB<GS:DIAG> cyclically.

The function keys

F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6

New par
Status
Analysis
1st tmout
Poll mode
Cur tmout

F8 Cancel

Branch to the operating screen form

Program status
Display "criteria analysis" screen form
Display the initial value of a timeout
Change to the polling mode
Determine and display the current timeout.
This brings about an automatic change to the
polling mode to read out the current timeout
and you then return to the operating mode.
If timeout criteria are available:
the selection screen form is displayed (steps,
transitions, MSZ).
Return

Working with Diagnosis on the PG

The function keys F4 (1st tmout) and F6 (Cur tmout) are only
active when FB 67 sends a timeout message:
no timeout occurred: F4 and F6 not active
- timeout occurred, but no changes compared with initial value
acquired: F6 not active.
-

Selection box in
the screen form

If you press either F3 (Analysis) or F2 (Status) when a timeout

has occurred, a selection box appears in the screen form.

Group timeout
message

This indicates that at least one SB on one of the monitored PLCs

has a timeout. This means that a timeout message must have
arrived at the PG.
If an SB has a timeout but there is not yet a message in the
message buffer, then "no message in message buffer" is displayed
at the top of the screen.

Direct connection

With a direct connection via AS 511, DIRECT CONNECTION is

entered as the path name.

Initial value,
refresh value

GRAPH 5 diagnosis distinguishes between an initial value

message and the current timeout status.
The initial value message reflects (and stores) the situation as it
was after the block was run through in the cycle in which the
timeout first occurred. Only the initial value is buffered.
The current timeout status (current value or refresh value) reflects
the situation when changes have occurred after the first timeout.
The current value is not buffered, but is ovenvritten when the
screen forms are updated.

Criteria analysis
function

With the criteria analysis function, you can display error criteria
directly on the PG with symbol names and comments.

GRAPH 5 Diagnosis
6.5.6
Step Sequence
Diagnosis

Current messages about sequencers with a timeout are displayed

in the "step sequence diagnosis" screen form.
The screen form has two modes:
1. Display mode (polling mode) with cyclic polling. The only
softkey available is F1 (Inp mode) to change to the input mode.
2. The input mode for selecting various displays and changing to
the operating screen form.

Step sequence
diagnosis screen
form in the input
mode
(Step

sequence diagnosis
Message window :

Current message: 1
Path:

Pathnamel (max. 19 char.)

init value:

Mode:

SB:
AUTO

Number of timeouts: 2

1 Selected:
Path:

Pathnamel (max. 19 char.)

Mode:

Steps:

10122

Transitions:

11122

SB:
AUTO

Path:

Pathname2

07.10.1993

Steps:

Transitions:

SB:
Mode:

Number of timeouts: 1

Selected:

16:32

Time:

6:12

Time:

07:Ol

S1

init value:

Time:

SB-comment-for-SE-27

27
Date:

Number of timeouts: 1

Selected:

06.10.1993

Comment-for-S10

S10

init value:

SB-comment-with-maximum-40-characters

100
Date:

1 to 3 of 5

S17

1 New par 2

AUTO

55
Date:

07.10.1993

Steps:

17

Transitions:

17

Step comment-S17

F
F
F
F
F
Status 3 Analysis 4 Ist tmout 5 Poll mode6Cur tmout7

F Help
8 Cancel

Working with Diagnosis on the PG

Polling mode

The polling mode is distinguished by the following:

a) There is no timeout:
an asterisk moving on an empty screen indicates that diagnosis
is in process.
b) There is a timeout:
display of the timeout message with the softkey menu.

Input mode

There is no cyclic polling in the input mode.

In this screen form up to three timeouts per screen page are
displayed. The currently selected timeout is displayed inversely.
All inputs relate to this message and to the SB it describes.
You can return to the polling mode with the key F5 (Poll mode).
If you change to the input mode without a selected timeout, only
keys F5 and F8 are active.

The function keys

F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F8

New par
Status
Analysis
1st tmout
Poll mode
Cur tmout
Cancel

Branch to the operating screen form

Program status
Output criteria analysis
Display the initial value of a timeout
Change to the polling mode
Determine and display the current timeout
Return

GRAPH 5 Diagnosis

Messages

Messages are recognized by the cyclic reading out of the

diagnostic DB. A message consists of all the messages belonging
to an SB.
If an error occurs, FB 67 automatically generates a message
which is entered in the diagnostic DB (= initial value). Using the
function key F6 (Cur tmout) a request bit for a refresh message is
set in the diagnostic DB. This bit indicates to FB 67 that the
current information about the timeout is required. FB 67 then
enters the current data in the diagnostic DB again.
This means that the initial value (status when the timeout occurred
and was detected) and refresh value (status when the refresh was
requested) are available to you. You can check whether changes
have taken place between these two points in time. Refresh values
are not buffered.

Time information

The times indicated in the message are the PG times when the
timeout was recognized and entered in the message buffer on the
PG.

Number of
messages

The PG can only manage a certain number of messages

(depending on the number of entries between 10 and 30
messages). If this number is exceeded, you are prompted to decide
whether the oldest message should be overwritten or the newest
message not entered in the message buffer. This selection remains
valid whenever the message buffer overflows until you exit the
GRAPH 5 diagnosis package.
The number of messages on the PLC is also limited. If there is an
overflow, messages are lost.

Stepsltransitions

The information "steps" and "transitions" indicate the steps or

transitions for which FB 67 has supplied messages.

Selected

Under "selected: sequence block", the comment from the

comment block is displayed.

Working with Diagnosis on the PG

6.5.7

Criteria Analysis

Information about criteria analysis exists if the diagnostic program

has found outputs which are not set or input scans which have not
been fulfilled in the steps/transitions with timeouts.

Criteria analysis
for a step

In the criteria analysis screen form, the assignments in a step

which have not been fulfilled and their criteria are displayed.
Absolute operands, symbols and additional comments are
displayed for each operand.
If several steps and transitions have timeouts, you must select the
required step or transition in the selection window prior to criteria
analysis.

Remember that the status of the SB after it has been run

through is retained as the basis for automatic timeout
analysis.

Criteria analysis
Path

SiMATic S5lPEG02

Pathnamel

init value:

SB:
Mode:

Date:

Number of timeouts: 1

lI

S1

27

AUTO:

SB-comment-for-SE-27
07.10.1993

Steps:

Transitions:

Time:

6:12

initial step

Assignment not fuifiiied:

F99.1

Flag comment

Q4.1

Comment

No. of criteria: 3
11.0

Symbol coiumn

Comment coiumn

12.1
F1.l
Assignment not fuifiiied:
This-is-output-5.0

IF

1 New par 2

F
F
F
F
F
Status 3 Analysis 4 Ist tmout 5 Poll mode6Cur tmout7

Comment for Q5.0

F Help
8 Cancel

Criteria analysis
for an MS2

With an MSZ, the number of the MSZ and if it exists the MSZ
comment are displayed below the default window (timeout
information).
All the other information is the same as with the analysis of a step.

-/'

Criteria analysis
Path

SiMATiC S5lPEG02

Pathnamel

init value:

SB:

Mode:

S5

MSZ A

SB-comment-for-SE-27

Date:

07.10.1993

Steps:

Transitions:

Number of timeouts: 1

Selected

27

AUTO:

Time:

6:12

Not programmed (MSZ)

MSZ comment
ASSIGNMENT NOT FULFILLED
Auxiliary flag for Q6 . 1

F 100.0

Value of Q 6 . 1 indicated here

No. of criteria : 3
12 . 0

Start

12 . 1

EMER OFF

Comment column

F1 . l
ASSIGNMENT NOT FULFILLED
Q5.0

This-is-output-5

.0

Comment for Q5 .0

F
F
F
F
F
F
1 New par 2 Status 3 Analysis 4 Ist tmout 5 Poll mode6Cur tmout7
F

Function keys in
the criteria
analysis screen

F1 New par

F2
F3
F4
F6
F8

Status
Analysis
1st tmout
Cur tmout
Cancel

F Help
8 Cancel

Branch to the operating screen form

Program status
Display criteria analysis
Criteria analysis of the initial value
Criteria analysis of the current value
Return to the previous screen form

Working with Diagnosis on the PG

Criteria analysis
for a transition

(Criteria
Path

In the criteria analysis for a transition, in contrast to steps or

MSZs, only the unfulfilled criteria are displayed which determine
the output RLO of the transition zoom-in. Any unfulfilled
assignments in the transition are not evaluated or displayed.
Normally, this involves the step flag.
Absolute operands, symbols and additional comments are
displayed for each operand.

analysis
Pathnamel

init value:

SB:
Mode:

AUTO:

Number of timeouts: 1

Selected

T1

27
Date:

SB-comment-for-SE-27
07.10.1993

Steps:

Transitions:

Time:

6:12

First transition

No. of criteria: 4
11.0

Symbol column

Comment column

Motor l

Motor for pump

12.1
F1.l
Q7.0

1 New par 2

F
F
F
F
F
Status 3 Analysis 4 Ist tmout 5 Poll mode6Cur tmout7

F Help
8 Cancel

GRAPH 5 Diagnosis
6.5.8
Operating Screen
Form

Terms:
PG control,
HW control

The operating screen form is divided into a display section (HW

op. screen) and an operating section (PG op. field). In the display
section, signal states of the hardware VOs are indicated and in the
operating section, you can change the set parameters in the editing
mode. Both parts represent the FB used in CSF representation in
the polling mode. In the polling mode, the status for each
parameter is displayed. The bit inputs of the operating section can
be changed using the select function in the editing mode.
If the data word in the user DB (DB<GS:SEQUENCE>)is set to
"PG control allowed" (data word 33 bit 3=1), the set or modified
parameters are entered and written to the diagnostic DB
@B<GS:DIAG>), when you press the enter key. This is displayed
in the polling mode by the term "PG control".
If the data word in the user DB is set to "external control" (110s)
(data word 33 bit 3=0), the term "HW control" appears in the
polling mode and you can set the parameters (mode,
acknowledgement etc.) via the hardware VOs.

DW 33, Bit 3 = 0
If bit 3 is wired in the hardware, it is not completely
protected from manipulation in the software.

Function keys

F3 Select
F7 Enter
F8 Cancel

Change the parameter value

Enter the selected functions
Return to the previous screen form

A change in the mode must be confirmed again after you make

the selection.

Working with Diagnosis on the PG

Changing
parameters

If a parameter value has been changed, this is highlighted in color

on the screen.
With parameters which react to a positive-going edge, the
character "---" indicates that first the value 0 and then the value 1
is written to the diagnostic DB.

Note
You yourself must be responsible for the interaction of the
selected parameters (some settings are only dependent on the
mode).

Screen form with

FB 70

/
1

Operating screen form

PATH: PATH1

SB: 37

SYMBOL for SB 37

FBTYPE: F B I 0

=HW op, screen

PG op. field
PG control
10-

SB-NR

UBET
STO
ZUST
SSTO
StAK
SANZ

I:

F
2

F
3 Select

UBET
STO
ZUST
SSTO
StAK
SANZ

F
6

F
7

Enter

F Help
8 Cancel

The following parameters cannot be changed in this screen form:

N-ST
DIAG

GRAPH 5 Diagnosis

Screen form with

FB 71

Operating screen form

PATH PATH1

SB: 37

FB TYPE: : FB 71

SYMBOL for SB 37

=HW op, screen

PG op. field
PG control

SBNR
HKET
STRT
S-NR
S-UE
UQIT
ANZt
DlAG

F
1

F
2

STO
SSTO
ZUST
StAK
UEND
SANZ

2 5 d SBNR

STO

oj
:j*

SSTO
ZUST
StAK
UEND
SANZ

S-NR

F
3 Select

F
4

F
5

ANZt
DIAG

F
6

F
7 Enter

F Help
8 Cancel

The following parameters cannot be changed in this screen form:

SBNR
HKET
STRT
DIAG

Working with Diagnosis on the PG

Screen form with

FB 72/FB 73

Operating screen form

PATH: PATH1

=HW

SB: 37

SIMATIC s 5 i PEGOP

FB TYPE: : F 6 7 2

SYMBOL for SB 37

op, screen

0
0

STO -

2 5 1 SBNR
AUS

0-

TlPP

0O-1

Ttl
UQIT

STO

'-p

Tt1
UQIT

F
2

0-

F
F
3 Select 4

F
5

F
6

F
7 Enter

F Help
8 Cancel

The following parameter cannot be changed in this screen form:

SBNR

PG op. field
PG control

2 5 1 SBNR

Screen form with

FB 74

Operating screen form

PATH PATH1

SB: 37

FE TYPE: FE 74

SB: 25 SYMBOL

HW op, screen

PG op. field

PG control
2 5 4 SBNR

25

O1

SBNR

25

SBNR

SYN

STO - 1

SANW

SYN

F
2

F
F
3 Select 4

F
5

F
6

FB 74 can be used in conjunction with:

FB 72 or
- FB 73.
FB 74 cannot be run alone.
-

F
7 Enter

F Help
8 Cancel

Example of GRAPH 5 Diagnosis

6.6

Example of GRAPH 5 Diagnosis

The following example relates to the example "powder press" in
Section 4.8.
The parts of the press, the cycle, the planning and programming
of SB 10 are described in Section 4.8.

6.6.1
Blocks on the PLC

The following standard blocks must exist on the PLC:

SBs and FBs

SB 3 standard sequence block

FB 73 standard function block for main sequence
FB 69 diagnostic FB, FB<GS:DIAG>
FB 68 diagnostic FB, FB<COPY>
FB 67 diagnostic FB, FB<PG:COPY>

Parameter DBs

Assign parameters for DB<GS:PARA> with the DB editor (refer

to the S5 basic package) and transfer it to the PLC.
Here, DB 249 is used as the DB<GS:PARA>. For information on
DB<GS:PARA> refer to Sections 6.7 and 7.3.

Diagnostic DB and
working DB

Generate the diagnostic DB and the working DB with the function

DB-GEN on the PG and then transfer them to the PLC:
DB 254
DB 10

diagnostic DB = DB<GS:DIAG>
working DB = DB<GS:SEQUENCE>

GRAPH 5 Diagnosis

6.6.2
Programming
Start-up OBs

For this example, the start-up OBs are programmed as follows

and then transferred to the PLC:
OB 20
:C DB 249
:L KF +20
:T DW 8

Data block for parameter assignment

OB number

OB 21
:C DB 249 Data block for parameter assignment
:L KF +21 OB number
:T DW 8

OB 22
:C DB 249
:L KF +22
:T DW 8

6.6.3
Block Calls

Data block for parameter assignment

OB number

In OB 1, a program block PB 10 is called which then calls FB 73.

The number of the PB should be the same as the number of the
SB to make the program clearer.
After calling all the sequencers with the standard blocks FB 70 to
FB 75, program block PB 9 is called in OB 1. This contains the
cyclic part of all the GRAPH 5 diagnosis.

Example of GRAPH 5 Diagnosis

6.6.4

Blocks for the

Cyclic Part

In this example, OB 1, PB 9 and PB 10 are programmed as

follows and transferred to the PLC.

OB 1
:AF
:R F
:JU
:JU

1.0
1.0
PB 10
PB 9

PB 9
:C DB 10
:L DR 33
:T EY 255
:A I 11.7
:= F 255.3

flag permanently 0
call sequencer with FB 70-75
call GRAPH 5 Diagnosis

open DB 10 (working DB)

DR 33 control word special functions
HW op. screen
(control mode selection
via D 33.3)

:L FY 255
:T DR 33
call FB 69 GRAPH 5 Diagnosis
:JU FB 69
Name :G5:DIAG
PARA :DB 249 parameter data block
:BE
(See also Chapter 7, "Structure of the Data Blocks").

GRAPH 5 Diagnosis

Segment 1
: A F 1.0
:R F 1.0 flag RLO permanently 0

.***

Segment 2
:JU FB 73 call FB 70
Name :GPH:HKET
SBNR :KFt10
AUS :I 4.1 AUS switch on HW op. screen
A/H :I 4.0 AIH switch on HW op. screen
TIPP :F 1.0 TIPP switch on HW op. screen
T t 1 :F 1.0 T t 1 button on HW op. screen
QIT :I 4.2 QIT button on HW op. screen
STO :A 1.5 STO display on HW op. screen
:BE
(see also Chapter 4 Detailed Description of the FB)
FB 73 must be transferred the number of the SB to be called
(SB 10). The standard parameters of the function block FB 73
must also be supplied.
In, for example, the step sequence overview of GRAPH 5
diagnosis, you can now observe the SBs on the monitored PLC
and locate the cause of a timeout using criteria analysis or
program status.

Detailed Description of the FB

6.7

Detailed Description of the FB

6.7.1
FB 69 Start-up,
Operation and
Monitoring

FB 69 start-up
section

FB 69 processes the diagnosis. When it is called, only the

parameter data DB is transferred as a parameter (formal operand:
PARA). FB 69 consists of a start-up and a cyclic section.

The parameter data DB (DB<GS:PARA>) contains the parameters

necessary for GRAPH 5 diagnosis.
You assign values for DW 1to DW 8. After the content of DW 8,
FB 69 recognizes a start-up ID, activates its start-up section,
triggers test routines and distinguishes the following:

- start-up for DB<GS.DIAG>

- start-up for DB<DIAG>
This is based on the assignment of the DB<GS:PARA>.
(refer to Section 7.3)
Once the start-up has been triggered @B<GS:PARA>:DW 8), the
following is checked:

- whether a GRAPH 5 SB exists on the PLC and

- whether the GRAPH 5 editor z V6.0 has been used
(compatibility check).
If these conditions are fulfilled, the start-up section for
DB<GS:DIAG> and DB<DIAG> is activated separately.

GRAPH 5 Diagnosis

Start-up for
DB<GB:DIAG>

Transfer from DB<PARA> to DB<GS:DIAG>

DW1
:

DW63

*:

DW7

DW79

The parameters are accepted:

during the first start-up and
- when the PLC address is changed by DB<GS:DIAG> by
transferring it from the PG.
-

The field length in DW 7 is fixed internally to KF + 30.

If the data words DW 5 and DW 6 are not assigned, the pointer
KF + 1 is entered.

Detailed Description of the FB

Start-up for
DB<DIAG>

Generation of DB<DIAG> with the parameters from

DB<GS:PARA>
- Entry of the start pointer in DB<DIAG> DW 0 to DW 11
-

The DB is generated when:

DB<DIAG> has been deleted
- an incorrect DB<DIAG> exists on the PLC
(calculated DB length does not match existing DB length)
- DB length min. l field, max. 135 fields
- not enough free RAM memory on the PLC.
-

In DB<GS:DIAG>, DW 162 is used to indicate the start-up

section. If there is an error, FB 69 remains in the start-up section
and monitors/checks the requests already executed.
DB<GS:DIAG> D
D 162.1
D 162.2
D 162.3
D 162.15

162.0 start-up section DB<DIAG> active

start-up section DB<GS:DIAG> active
start-up complete without errors
start-up error
incompatible

Once the start-up section has been completed successfully, the

whole sequencer image is entered in DB<GS:DIAG> and all the
timeout and acknowledgement messages are suppressed. Instead
of these, a DB-GEN message is sent and the operating and
monitoring section is enabled.

Tip

When starting up the system software, in OB 1, the ID + l can be

written in DB< G5:PARA> DW 8. This means that the start-up
section is also active cyclically. Changes made for example with
the PG function DB-GEN are taken into account immediately. On
conclusion of the planning phase, you should delete this program
section to reduce the cycle time in OB 1 and only write
DB<GS:PARA> DW 8 in the start-up OB. The start-up ID is
cleared when the start-up section is completed successfully.

GRAPH 5 Diagnosis

FB 69 operation
and monitoring
section

The operating
section

Running sequencers
You can select a sequencer via DB<GS:DIAG> DW 20.
You can control the modes using DW 21 to DW 23 (assuming
that DB<GS:SEQUENCE>:DW 33.3=1).
Messages from the sequencer are stored in DW 25 to DW 27.
Enabling in DB<GS:SEQUENCE>:DW 33.3=1 does not cause the
active mode to change.

Using the access procedure to DB<DIAG>

(Semaphore)
GRAPH 5 diagnosis is not involved in the access procedure and
therefore has the lowest priority. This procedure allows you to
evaluate DB<DIAG> using other diagnostic units or other
diagnostic concepts.
If you do use other diagnostic units, you must implement the
function selection according to the following schematic:

Detailed Description of the FB

Program on the
diagnostic unit
I

after timen t

after timen t

Logon
Read from DW 1 + 2

no

Semaphore
' occupied

Since DW 1 and DW 2 = 0,
the semaphore is free

Random number
1 word 0

Random number--

DW 1

I.

I
Read DW 1 and DW 2

after nt

by requester!
Device ID -- DW 4

sign of life flag

DW
Logoff
OtoDW1

DB <DIAG>

GRAPH 5 Diagnosis

Principle of
semaphore
evaluation

The evaluation of the semaphore is integrated in FB 69 on the

PLC.
Principle

Logoff
DWI -4=0

Logon active
DW1 - D W 2

Logon remains
DW1
DW2-

Start monitoring
clear sign of life flag

DW

Logoff (DW 1 4 = 0)

DBcDIAG>

Detailed Description of the FB

The monitoring
section

Here, FB 69 monitors all the sequencers entered in

DB<GS:DIAG>, initially for two states and then sends appropriate
messages:

1. Sequence X with timeout edge = timeout message

edge = acknowledgement messages
2. Sequence X no timeout
In addition to this, there are refresh messages for certain
sequencers (on request) and the DBGEN message from the
start-up section. The messages are structured according to the
following priorities:
1st priority

DBGEN

: No status evaluation

Only one message with the header

data from DB<GS:DIAG> DW 80 to
DW 87 and all other messages
suppressed for one PLC cycle. Status
is not read.
2ndpriority

STOE

: Status evaluation with all necessary

data for acquiring the 1st timeout of

every sequencer up to a maximum
STOE number within the 1st PLC
cycle. A separate timeout message is
output for each simultaneous branch.
The status is read.
3rdpriority

REFRESH

: Message structure as with STOE,

however, only for the selected

sequencer via DB<GS:DIAG>
DW 20. If there is no longer a
timeout, a QUIT message is sent for
the selected sequence.
4th priority

QUIT

: Message structure as for DB-GEN,

however, with additional information

about the SB number and status
word of the sequencer. The status is
not read.

GRAPH 5 Diagnosis

Diagnosis is always from the start of a zoom-in (pointer list). FB

calls and their parameters are excluded, as well as all commands
which cannot be diagnosed.
The only commands which can be diagnosed are the following
binary logic operations.

CPU 928B or CPU 9461947

The individual statuses of the signal scan are formed and written
into a message with the ID "statuses read".
The sequence of messages are structured on the PLC when
necessary by FB<GS:DIAG> based on the type of field. The IDs
and further message structure are illustrated in the following
schematic.

Detailed Description of the FB

ID and further
message structure

Step progr.hmed
First/
Firstt next

step bmpty

Status Sn
SIM: max. 8 S

step A p t y

ll

ll

MSZ not programmed

MSZ programmed

First/
First+ next

Status MSZ A

First+ next

Status MS2 B

First+ next

Status MSZ J

Simultaneous
First+ nexi
+ End ID

Sequence of
messages
Priority

Statur T l

Alternative

First/
First+ next

Statys T1

First+ next

Status T8

Repeat for every SIM branch!

Each SIM branch represents its own
timeout. The number of STOE
can be selected.
First:

First message
Possible ID from DBGEN /QUIT / Refresh / STOE
Combination with refresh

Next:

Next message,
with statuses, always follows with the 2nd until the last message for the other IDs

End:

End ID
with statuses, always follows in the last message for the other iDs

Number of messages

minimum

1 T (Step zoom-in / MSZ empty)

normal
(generally)

1StIT

maximum

8 s t n MSZt m T

GRAPH 5 Diagnosis

6.7.2
FB 68, Write Data

This standard FB is called by FB 69 and is responsible for the

correct entry of a message from DB<GS:DIAG> in DB<DIAG>.
FB 68 monitors and sets the write pointer to the next message
field and, if necessary, enters the OVERFLOW in DB<DIAG>
DW 10.

Note
This block only needs to be loaded. You can only call it
when you wish to include your own entries in DB<DIAG>.
Note the following points.

Transfer parameters Before calling FB 68, the flag word must be supplied as input
parameters.
FW 230 KF

DB-NR.

Source (structure of a message after

occupying DB<GS:DIAG>DW 80 to
109)

FW 232 KF

DW-NR.

Source message start DB<GS:DIAG>

+ KFt80)

FW 234 KF

DB-NR.

Destination

DB<DIAG>

After processing FB 68, its output parameters must be supplied if

necessary in flag byte 246.
F 246.0 = 1

Message transfer complete without error

Internal scratchpad flags used: FY 230 to FY 246!

The scratchpad flags can be overwritten outside the FB 68
boundaries.

Important

Whenever FB 68 is run through, a message is entered in

DB<DIAG>.
- Limits DB<DIAG> (1st priority) write pointer = read pointer,
and the last message is overwritten and OVERFLOW
indicated in DW 10.
-

Detailed Description of the FB

6.7.3
FB 67, Read Data

This standard FB is called by FB 69 and is responsible for the

correct reading of a message from DB<DIAG> into
DB<GS:DIAG>. FB 67 communicates with the "GRAPH 5
diagnosis" PG software via the control word DW 160 in
DB<GS:DIAG>. FB 67 manages the reading of data as a passive
partner of the PG software, i.e. the PG requests information,
FB 67 reads and transfers the information to the PG. If the
semaphore is entered in DB<DIAG>, FB 67 automatically sets
itself to the second priority after all other diagnostic units and no
longer destroys the data when it reads them. The information in
DB<DIAG> must therefore be deleted by additional diagnostic
units, otherwise DB<DIAG> will be written full.
You must only call this block when you are using your own
diagnosis, to read information from DB<DIAG>. The following
point must be remembered.

This block only needs to be loaded. You can only call it

when you want to read out your own entries from
DB<DIAG> to the working DB. Please remember the
following points:

Transfer parameters

Before calling FB 67, the flag words must be supplied as input

parameters
FW 230 KF

DB-NR.

Destination: structure of a message

after occupying DB<GS:DIAG>DW
120 to 159

FW 232 KF

DW-NR.

Start of destination DB<GS:DIAG>

+ KFt120

FW 234 KF

DB-NR.

Source

DB<DIAG>

Internally occupied scratchpad flags: FY 230 to 247.

Each time data is read, the diagnostic unit must set D 160.0=1 in
DB<destination>. FB 67 deletes this bit after entering a message
and updates the status in DL 160.

GRAPH 5 Diagnosis

After processing FB 67, its pointers are updated in DB<source>

and its status bits in DB<destination>.
DBedest>

1
Important

D 160.8

Read a message

D 160.9

OVERFLOW @Besource> DW 10)

1 D 160.10

Read message

Basic assignmentDB<GS:DIAG> DW 120 to DW 160

DB<DIAG>DW 5 to DW 11
- Semaphore of a different diagnostic unit active:
status bit DB<dest> D 162.9=1
-

Structure of the Data Blocks

Structure of the Data Blocks

7.1

Assignment of the Working DB: DB<GS:Sequence>

This section describes the data words of the working data block of
a sequencer. The data words are written to both statically and
dynamically.
In the static part, the GRAPH 5 editor writes the data words with
values for the specific sequencer during generation. These values
are retained while the program is running and must not be
modified.
The dynamic part of the working DB is overwritten by the
standard function blocks such as FB 70, FB 71, FB 72 etc.
cyclically and is therefore constantly changing.
Internal data must not be modified.
An overview of the static and dynamic assignment of the data
words can be found at the end of this chapter where the working
DB is illustrated once again.
The sequence block number is entered in DL 0.
The input parameter SBNR in FB 70 and FB 71 or FB 72 or
FB 73 etc. must match DL 0 to be able to process the sequence
block.
The length of the sequencer, i.e. the number of steps in the
sequence block, is entered in DR 0 (without the steps SA, SB...).
Using the function DB-GEN on the PG, not only the working DB
for the sequencer but also a diagnostic DB is generated. The block
number of this diagnostic DB is entered in DR 1.
0

Sequence block no. (KF)

Number of steps (KF);

(without SA, SB..Sn)

KHOO

No. of the DB<GS:DIAG>(KF)

Assignment of the Working DB: DB<GS:Sequence>

If a timeout occurs in a sequencer, the numbers of the steps with a

timeout are entered in DW 2 to 5 (indicated by the timeout bar in
the status of the sequencer overview).
A maximum of one step can have a timeout in a simultaneous
branch.

S-no. timeout level 1(KF)

S-no. timeout level 2(KF)

S-no. timeout level 3(KF)

S-no. timeout level 4(KF)

S-no. timeout level 5(KF)

S-no. timeout level 6(KF)

S-no. timeout level 7(KF)

S-no. timeout level 8(KF)

When generating the data blocks, all the GRAPH 5 blocks are
determined from the PLC or the program file.
In DL 7, the next GRAPH 5 block number if entered if it exists.
DW 8 and DW 9 contain IDs of the software releases used.
DW 8 contains an ID of the GRAPH 5 editor.
DW 9 is supplied by the standard FB with an ID of its release.

1
1

I
1

Reserved standard FB: expansions

Next DB<GS:Seauence> KF

PG software version (KY)

PLC software version (KY)

KH 00

When the sequencer switches to the next step (step enabling

condition fulfilled and waiting time elapsed) the new step
numbers are entered in DW 10 to 17). These values are, however,
only valid for this single cycle. Othenvise the values are identical
to those of DW 20 to 27.

1
1

1
1

Structure of the Data Blocks

10

Next step at level 1 at the time of the switchover for one cycle (KF)

...

...

17

Next step at level 8 at the time of the switchover for one cycle (KF)

DL 18 contains the number of steps in code. A bit is set for each

16 steps.
Example:
DL 18 0000 0111
The sequencer consists of 33<= steps<=48
The number of program simultaneous levels is indicated in
DR 18. For each level created, a bit is displayed.
Example:
DR 18 0000 1111
A sequencer with 4 simultaneous levels
The current step numbers in which the sequencer is currently
located are entered in DW 20 to 70. One data word is reserved for
each level (simultaneous branch). In a linear sequence (including
alternative branches) only DW 20 is written to.
Coded number of steps
1bit116 stem

19

Internal data!

20

Current step number

level 1 (KF)

...

...

27

Current step number

level 8 (KF)

28

Reserved

Number of simultaneous levels

l bitilevel

Assignment of the Working DB: DB<GS:Sequence>

The input parameters of the standard FBs (FB 70 to 75) are

entered in DW 29 as follows:

.O

AUS

.l

AUTO (A/H = 1)

.2

HAND (A/H = 0)

.3

SLOE

.4

SANW

.5

TIP0

.6

TIPP (SSMB)

.7

MAKT

.8

T+1

.9

KEND

.l0

B-UE

.l1

S-UE

.l2

QUIT

.l3

UQIT

.l4

ANZ+

.l5

29

Image of the input parameters FB 70-74 (KM)

Structure of the Data Blocks

The active modes and incompatibility with the standard FB are

indicated in DW 30:

AUS
AUTO
HAND
SLOE
SANW
TIP0
TIPP (SSMB)
SSMB +MAKT
DIAG
KEND
SO
standard FB incompatible with PG software

S+AK: more than one step active

SSTO: step with timeout indicated in SANZ
STO

30

Active modes (KM)

Assignment of the Working DB: DB<GS:Sequence>

Pulses for operating a sequencer are saved in DW 31. These

pulses (positive-going edge) are available for evaluating a PLC
cycle.
If bit = 1, the following applies

D31

31

.O

T+1

.l

KENDFB 74: SYN

.2

B-UE

.3

S-UE

.4

QUIT

.5

UQIT

.6

ANZ+

.7

steo 0 is set

Pulsesfor modes

DW 32 contains IDs entered by the standard FBs. This makes it

easy to see which blocks processed the sequencer.
Example:

DW 32 = 0004
DW 32 = 0303
DW 32 = 5303
DW32=5001

FB identifier FB 74/75 (KH)

FB 74 = 3
FB 75 = 50

FB 73
FB 72 + FB 74
FB 72 + FB 74 + FB 75
FB70+FB75
FB identifier FB 70-73 (KH)
FB 70 = 1; FB 71 = 2
FB 72 = 3; FB 73 = 4

Structure of the Data Blocks

Using DW 33, special functions for processing the sequencer can
be activated.
If bit = 1 the following applies:

D33

33

.O

If there is a timeout all step flags AUS

.l

If there is a timeout step flag AUS of steps with timeout

.2

Activate TM-MIN

.3

Select modes of the standard FBs via DW 34-35

.8

Start of the synchronization

.9

Activate the synchronization

.l0

Indication: activate synchronization

.l1

Indication: synchronization clear

.l2

Select search function with synchronization

Selection and indication of mode special functions(KM)

Assignment of the Working DB: DB<GS:Sequence>

The selection of the modes is via DW 34 and DW 35 when

D 33.3=1.
All the parameters of the standard FBs which can be addressed by
DW 34 and DW 35 are deactivated.
If bit = 1 the following applies:

D34

.O

AUS

.l

AUTO (A/H = 1)

.2

HAND (A/H = 0)

.3

SLOE

.4

SANW

.5

TIP0

.6

TIPP (SSMB)

.7

MAKT

.8

T+1

.9

KEND

.l0

B-UE

.l1

S-UE

.l2

QUIT

.l3

UQIT

.l4

ANZ

.l5

step SO active

A step number must be entered in DW 35 if SANW is to be

activated via DW 34.
Selection of modes for operation and monitoring (KM)
Step number for SANW via DW 34 (KF)
Reserved for standard FB: expansions

...

Structure of the Data Blocks

All timer numbers for monitoring and waiting times are stored in
the following data words.
A timer for the waiting time and a timer for the monitoring time
are required per simultaneous level.
Timer base, i.e. the number of the first required timer, is stipulated
in the ID screen of the GRAPH 5 editor.
Example:

DW 42
DW 43
DW 44
DW 45-49
DW 50
DW 51
DW 52
DW 53-57

A sequencer with 3 simultaneous levels;

T 20 was selected as the timer base.

+ 20
+ 22
+ 24

T 20

waiting time

TW level1

T 22

waiting time

TW level2

T 24

waiting time

TW level3

T 21

monitoring time

TM level1

T 23

monitoring time

TM level2

T 25

monitoring time

TM level3

+ 21
+ 23
+ 25
0

Timer number for TW level 1

...

Timer number for TW level 8

Timer number for TM level 1
n m e r number for TM level 8

The flag addresses of the initial steps are entered in DW 58 to 66.

A maximum of one initial step can be programmed per
simultaneous level.
Example:

A sequencer with initial step S1

234.1
DW 58 = OlEA

Assignment of the Working DB: DB<GS:Sequence>

Important

At least one initial step per sequence.

Flag address for initial step level 1:
Format: KY = X,Y where X = bit address and Y = byte address

58

...

...

Flag address for initial step level 8

65

Each step of a sequencer has a separate step flag (symbolized on

the PG by F 233.0).
The step flags are saved in the data area DW 66 to 73. If the
sequencer is at step 10, then F 233.2=1. FW 234 is written to
DW 66 and D 66.2 therefore corresponds to step 10.

66

Step flag S

7-S

Step flag S

15 - S

67

Step flag S

23 - S 16

Step flag S

31 - S 24

68

Step flag S

39 - S 32

Step flag S

47 - S 40

69

Step flag S

55 - S 48

Step flag S

63 - S 56

70

Step flag S

71 - S 64

Step flag S

79 - S 72

71

Step flag S

87 - S 80

Step flag S

95 - S 88

72

Step flag S 103 - S 96

Step flag S Ill - S 104

73

Step flag S 119 - S 112

Step flag S 127 - S 120

The following data words must not be modified:

74

7'

Internal data!

If a timeout occurs in the sequencer, the level of the sequencer

with the timeout is entered in DL 78.
If a linear sequence, this means that bit D 78.8 is always updated
if there is a timeout.

78

STOE level 8-1 (KM)

Internal data

Structure of the Data Blocks

The following data words must not be modified:
79

Internal data

DW 109 contains the step number for diagnosis.

With FB 70, DW 109 is identical to the output parameter SANZ
with the exception that in DW 109 the value is binary and not in
BCD code.
With FB 72/73, DW 109 only refers to level 1.
109

Indication: FB 70 SANZ / FB 72-73 S-no. level 1 for O&M

The following data words must not be modified:

130

Reserved for standard FB: expansions

The following data words DW 161 to 192 are only used by FB 75

for storing timers.
The programmed times of the current steps are saved in DW 161
to 176.
161

Programmed time value TW for level 1 (KT)

...

Programmed time value TW for level 8 (KT)

Programmed time value TM for level 1 (KT)

...

Programmed time value TM for level 8 (KT)

Assignment of the Working DB: DB<GS:Sequence>

The remaining times of the current steps are saved in DW 177 to

192.
177

Remaining time TW for level 1 (KT)

;84

Remaining time TW for level 8 (KT)

185

Remaining time TM for level 1 (KT)

192

Remaining time TM for level 8 (KT)

...

...

...

The following data words must not be modified:

193

Internal data

DW 229 to 239 are used for automatic synchronization with the

aid of SB 5.
l

229

Number of syn steps found (KF)

230

One step for synchronization: step number found (KF)

231

Possible synchronization steps: S 0-S 15 (KM)

238

Possible synchronization steps: S 112-S 127 (KM)

239

SB no. of generated synchronization block (KF)

...

240
.I5

...

Free for user

Structure of the Data Blocks

Assignment of DB<GS:Sequence>

Sequence block no. (KF)

Number of steps (KF):

(without SA, SB..Sn)

KHOO

No. of the DB<GS:DIAD>(KF)

S-no. timeout level 1(KF)

S-no. timeout level 2(KF)

S-no. timeout level 3(KF)

S-no. timeout level 4(KF)

S-no. timeout level 5(KF)

S-no. timeout level 6(KF)

S-no. timeout level 7(KF)

S-no. timeout level 8(KF)

Reserved standard FB: expansions

l

KH 00

Next DB<GS:Sequence> KF

PG software version (KY)

PLC software version (KY)

10

Next step at level 1 at the time of the switchover for one cycle (KF)

Number of simultaneous levels

Assignment of the Working DB: DB<GS:Sequence>

Assignment of DB<GS:Sequence>

1
1
1

33

Selection and indication of mode special functions (KM)

34

Selection of modes for operation and monitoring (KM)

35

Step number for SANW via DW 34 (KF)

1
1
1

Reserved for standard FB: expansions

Timer number for TW level 1

n m e r number for TW level 8
Timer number for TM level 1
n m e r number for TM level 8
Flag address for initial step level 1:
Format: KY = X,Y where X = bit address and Y = byte address

...

Flag address for initial step level 8

1
1
1

Step flag S

7-S

67

Step flag S

23 - S 16

68

Step flag S

39 - S 32

69

Step flag S

55 - S 48

70

Step flag S

71 - S 64

71

Step flag S

87 - S 80

72

Step flag S 103 - S 96

Step flag S 111 - S 104

73

Step flag S 119 - S 112

Step flag S 127 - S 120

1
1
1

Step flag S

15 - S

Step flag S

31 - S 24

Step flag S

47 - S 40

Step flag S

63 - S 56

Step flag S

79 - S 72

step flag S

95 - S 88

1
1
1

Internal data!

78

STOE level 8-1 (KM)

Internal data

Internal data

Assignment of DB<GS:Sequence>
DW
109

Indication: FB 70 SANZ / FB 72-73 S-no. level 1for operation and monitoring

110

Internal data

...

129
130

...

Reserved for standard FB: expansions

160
161

Programmed time value TW for level 1 (KT)

168

Programmed time value TW for level 8 (KT)

169

Programmed time value TM for level 1 (KT)

176

Programmed time value TM for level 8 (KT)

177

Remaining time TW for level 1 (KT)

184

Remaining time TW for level 8 (KT)

...
...
...

...
...
...

~ !!~
185

Remaining time TM for level 1 (KT)

192

Remaining time TM for level 8 (KT)

193

Internal data

...

...

229
230

One step for synchronization: step number found (KF)

231

Possible synchronization steps: SO-S15 (KM)

iossible synchronization steps: Sll2-S127 (KM)

SB no. of generated synchronization block (KF)

240

...

Free for user

Assignment of the GRAPH 5 Diagnostic DB: DB<G5:DIAG>

Assignment of the GRAPH 5 Diagnostic DB: DB<GS:DIAG>

The DB is divided into a static and dynamic section.

Static structure of DB<GS:DIAG>

This block is generated following static assignment with a length
of 261 (DW 0 to DW 255) using the function DB-GEN and is
used when dynamically assigned as the GRAPH 5 diagnostic data
block for criteria analysis.
The existing GRAPH 5 sequence blocks are entered according to
a defined pattern with binary IDs in DW 2 to DW 17 and the
editor version in DW 18. All other DWs have the default value
KH = 0000.

Structure of the Data Blocks

Static structure of DB<GS:DIAG>

Right byte

Left byte

DW
l

Reserved (KH 0000)

1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1

SB
no.

1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 9

1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 9

SB
no.

31

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 9

SB no.

47- 32

SB no.

63- 48

SB no.

79- 64

SB no.

95- 80

SB no.

111-96

SB no.

127- 112

10

SB no.

143- 128

11

SB no.

159- 144

12

SB no.

175- 160

13

SB no.

191- 176

14

SB no.

207- 192

15

SB no.

223- 208

16

SB no.

239- 224

SB no.

255- 240

30

29

28

27

26

25

1
1

1
1

1
1

1
1

1
1

1
1

Version of GRAPH 5 editor KY = xxx, yyy

xxx = Root number for software test; number only changed if
incompatibility detected
yyy = Sub-number for updates
Buffer area for PLC
(PG function: DB-GEN

KH 0000)

Assignment of the GRAPH 5 Diagnostic DB: DB<G5:DIAG>

Dynamic structure of DB<GS:DIAG>

(With the standard FBs 67 to FB 69)
Assignment

This block is generated as "static DB<GS:DIAG>" with the

function DB-GEN.
During cyclic processing with the standard FBs 67 to 69 and the
GRAPH 5 diagnosis package, the static DWs have the
significance listed below. The image on the system always
corresponds only to the specially used subset.
If DB-GEN is run, all the dynamic data are deleted and FB 69
first updates the complete sequencer image by suppressing all
messages apart from one DB-GEN message.
DW 2 to DW 17 are marked by the DB-GEN function according
to a particular pattern based on the existing GRAPH sequence
blocks.
The fixed assignment of the individual bits to the SB numbers can
be found in the following table:

Structure of the Data Blocks

Dynamic structure of DB<GS:DIAG>

DW

1
1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1

Left byte

Rieht byte

Reserved
Reserved

SB
no.

1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 9

1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 9

SB
no.

31

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 9

SB no. 47- 32

SB no. 63- 48

SB no. 79- 64

SB no. 95- 80

SB no. 111-96

SB no. 127- 112

10

SB no. 143- 128

11

SB no. 159- 144

12

SB no. 175- 160

13

SB no. 191- 176

14

SB no. 207- 192

15

SB no. 223- 208

16

SB no. 239- 224

30

29

28

27

26

25

1
1

I
I

1
1

I
I

1
1

I
I

SB no. 255- 240

Version of GRAPH 5 editor 1. version supplied KY = 4,O
KY = xxx, yyy
xxx = Root number for software test; Number only changed if
incompatibility detected
yyy = Sub-number for updates
Buffer area for PLC (PG function: DB-GEN KH 0000)
Version of PLC software: FB<G5:DIAG> first version supplied KY = 4,O

Assignment of the GRAPH 5 Diagnostic DB: DBcG5:DIAG>

DW 21 to DW 24 are only active for operation and monitoring
@B<GS:Sequence> D 33.3=1).
If this is the case, the data are transferred to DB<GS:Sequence>
and are activated for the sequencer according to the following
principle:
DW 20

Selection of the sequencer (10 5 X r 255)

DW 21

DB<GS:Sequence> DW 34

Here, there is no evaluation of the sign-of-life in DB<DIAG>.

Selection of the sub-sequence (FB 71) only via the main sequence
(FB 70).

1 DW 20 SB no, for mode seiection/dispiay/acknowiegment

1 DW 21 Mode seiection/acknowiedgment

TiPO
TiPP (SSMB)
MAKT
Ttl

DW 22 Reserved mode selection

DW 23 SANW: specifies step no. fright iustified: b i n a code)
~

1 DW 24 Reserved
Access by user: writelread
DW 25 to DW 27 are updated constantly for the selected
sequence (number in DW 20).

Structure of the Data Blocks

INKOMPATIBEL

DW 26

Reserved RM modes

DW 27

SANZ: Step indication (right justified: binary code)

DW 28

Reserved

DW 29

STO

8,

The current sequences with a timeout are entered in DW 30 to 45

according to the pattern in DW 1to DW 16.
The following applies:
RLO = 0 SB XXX 0.k.
RLO = 1 SB XXX with timeout

A signal change counts as an initial value group timeout for each

sequencer.
Meaning of the diagnosis: timeout new

DW 30

SB no.

15 - 0

DW 31

SB no.

31 - 16

DW 45

SB no.

255 - 240

Access by user: Only read access!

Assignment of the GRAPH 5 Diagnostic DB: DB<G5:DIAG>

The old sequencers with timeouts are entered according to the
same pattern.

DW 46

SB no.

15 - 0

DW 47

SB no.

31 - 16

DW 61

SB no.

255 - 240

DW 62

Reserved

Parameters for diagnosis

The programmer configuring the system stores parameters in a
parameter DB (DB<GS:PARA> DW 1to 17). These parameters
are read by FB<GS:DIAG> when the start-up section is activated
and entered in DW 63 to 79 and evaluated. Cyclic modification of DW 63 to 66 and DW 70 is only permitted
during the installation phase and must be entered in
DB<GS:PARA> before the system is completed, since these data
are only re-written during an-^^ 69 start-;p with a changed PLC
address for DB<GS:DIAG>.

l
1

Structure of the Data Blocks

DW 63 to 79 are adopted by FB<GS:DIAG> from
DBe PARA> DW 1to 17.

DW 63

KF

Max. number of timeouts per cycle

DW 64

KF

Max. number of criteria per stepitransition

DW 65

KY

Node number 1 CPU number

DW 66

KF

Number of cycles for sign of life

DW 67

KF

Max. number of entries in DB<DIAG>

DW 68

KF

First field in DB<DIAG>

DW 69

KF

Field length for DB<DIAG>

DW 70

KF

PLC start up: OB no. (1 cycle)

DW 71

Reserved

~
~ ~
D,73

DW 74

Internal data for FB<GS:DIAG> from start-up

Di79

DW 80 to 109 are occupied by the diagnosis field (DW 20

reserved exclusively).
These DWs are only updated with the following messages:
DB-GEN message
STO message
REFRESH message
QUIT message

These DWs are only used as a group buffer for the message to be
edited. With the transfer to DBeDIAG>, the entry is released for
the next message.
The last message edited is always in this data area DW 80 to 109.

Assignment of the GRAPH 5 Diagnostic DB: DBcG5:DIAG>

Structure of the message field: DW 80 to DW 109

(Reserved up to DW 119)
a) Header data DW 80 to DW 86
KF = length in words including header data

Field length

for 1st version supplied: fixed KF +30

Important:
The length depends on the maximum field
length in the DB<DIAG> (1 field length)
Reserved
Type of field

DW 83

DW 86

Field identifier

Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit

0: timeout message
1: achowledgment message
2: next field message
3: refresh message
4: DBGEN message
5: end identifier

KS G5 GRAPH 5

Hardware-ID:

KH 0000

Version field

KY XXX,YYY 1st version supplied: KY=4.0

XXX = Root number for SW test.
The number only changes if
incompatibility is detected, e.g.
different DB assignment/functions..
YYY = Sub-number for updates
Fixed:O
This number changes when the
software is updated

Address

KY KKK,CCC KKK=node address

CCC=address CPU no.

Access by user: Only read access: last message field for entry
in DB<DIAG>!

Structure of the Data Blocks

b) The useful data are updated by FB<GS:DIAG>

according to the type of field.

Diagnostic DB(= DB-GEN)

KY = SB no., step no.

KY
0
1-8
10

= MSZ identifier, level (specifies SIM-level 1-8)

= Step
= Alternative T
= MSZ

INKOMPATIBEL

W = Number of statuses in

The statuses (max. 256) are stored according to the generation

guidelines for the programmed criteria. The criteria are stored in
ascending order with their statuses in DW 94 to DW 108.

Assignment of the GRAPH 5 Diagnostic DB: DB<G5:DIAG>

Kno.

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

DW94

1514131211108

....
Reserved for possible expansions

nw 119
DW 120 to 159 are used as a buffer for the messages read by the
G5-DIAG package.
DW 160 is responsible for the communication.
The last message read is alwavs located here.
(for PG diagnosis)

DW 150

...

Reserved for possible expansions in the message field

Assignment as DW 110 119

DW 159
DW 160

Control word for communication PLC

DR 160 control bit from PG software to PLC
DL 160 control bit from PLC software to PG

PG

1
Last message

Triggered by PG:
Read next GRAPH 5 message
from DlAG !

Overflow DBcDIAG,

1
Completed message from PLC:
The next GRAPH 5 message from
DBDIAG triggered with bit 0
is entered!

If the G5-DIAG package does not exist on the PG/PC or is not

used, DW 110 to 160 can be used for your own diagnosis with the
same assignment.

DW 162 to 255 are used by the standard blocks FB 67 to 68 as

their own working area.

1 DW 162

Status of PLC software FB 67 - 69: oniv read access!

L s t a r t - u p DB<D~AG>
active
l

Other diagnostic
device exists

II

L;arl;p

1 1
1

L ~ t a r t - u complete
p

-start-up

incompatible

The other data bits are for internai status bits and must not
not be overwritten
DW 163 DW xxx occupied for internai data: FB<G5:DiAG>IFB<COPY>/
. . . FB<COPY:PG>i
DW 255

Access by user: Only read access!

DB<G5:DiAG>

error
,Mode selection
not active

Assignment of the GRAPH 5 Diagnostic Parameters: DB<GS:PARA>

7.3

Assignment of the GRAPH 5 Diagnostic Parameters:

DB<G5:PARA>

Assignment of DB<GS:PARA>

length z 25 words

DB<GS:DIAG>
Example
of an
assignment

DWO

free

Area
(vermitted)

DW 1

Max. number of timeouts/cycle

KF1...50

DW 2

Max. criteria per stepitransition

KF1....255

Node numbedCPU number

KY xxx,xxx

Number of cycles for selection monitoring

DB<DIAG>, DW 1-3

KF 1...32767

DW 3

l
I
I

I
I
I

I
I
I

Dw4

Dw5

Max. number of entries in

DB-DIAG

DW 6

First field in DB-DIAG

KF 1...134

DW 7

Field length for DB-DIAG

KF 30 fix

DW 8

PLC start-up ID: OB number

KF 1...255

DW 9

not used at present

KHO

DW 10

not used at present

KHO

DW 11

not used at present

KHO

DW 12

not used at present

KHo

DW 1 3

not used at present

KHO

DW 14

Internal data

KHO

DW 15

Internal data

KHo

DW 16

Internal data

KHO

DW 1 7

Internal data

KHO

Internal data

KHO

DW 18+
Dw19

FB 69 +=

DW 9 to DW 19 must be preassigned "0".

1
1

1
1
1

1
1
1
data entered in start-up section

Structure of the Data Blocks

7.4

Assignment of the Diagnostic DB: DB<DIAG>

DB<GS:DIAG> is generated with the PG function DB-GEN. The
diagnostic block DB<DIAG> is generated by FB<GS:DIAG>
with the number DB<GS:DIAG>+l and assigned the initial values
in field 0.
The length of DB<DIAG> depends on the number of entries in
DB<GS:PARA>.
This data block is used as a data buffer (FIFO principle) until a
diagnostic unit reads the information.

Note
The assignment of the diagnostic DB is only of interest in
the following situations:

- during installation or for additional evaluation or

- if you want to use your own diagnostic unit.

Assignment of the Diagnostic DB: DB<DIAG>

Free

KHo

Semaphore

KHO

Assignment of DB<DIAG>

Data word

Assignment

DW 0

Free

Field
no.

Meaning

Example of
preassignment
61 FB 69

Selection of semaphore (random

number from diagnostic system)

1
1
1

DW 2

Semaphore

DW 3

Sign-of-life

DW 4

Device ID

DW 5

DW no. start of last field used

DW 6

DW no. start of last field used

DW 7

Field length: fixed KF 30

KHO

1
1

1
1

Write pointer @W no. start of

next field.)
Read pointer @W no. start of
next field)

D i 2 9
DW 30

Max. 30 entries

First entrv

K F 3 0

Message length @W) fixed

KF 900

KF 30

1
1

Supplier of diagnostic data

0

Receiver of diagnostic data

OVERFLOW (=KHFFFF,
otherwise KH0000)

Buffer is full = FFFF

KF30

KHO

PG diagnosis: read pointer

29th entry

KF 900

Diagnostic data for second

timeout

Any

Reserved

Field 1

DW 59
DW 60

Field 2

DW 89

Last field

KHo

Structure of the Data Blocks

Notes on DB<DIAG>:
If the write pointer catches up with the read pointer (DW 8 =
DW 9), then OVERFLOW is indicated in DW 10. Following this,
only the last message field is overwritten by the new message
field, the write pointer does not move.

Principle: write pointer = read pointer (1st priority)

With the first priority (no diagnostic unit entered in the semaphore
+= DB<GS:DIAG> D 162.9=0), the OVERFLOW is deleted by
FB 67 after reading the next program field.
If a diagnostic unit is entered in the semaphore
+= (DB<GS:DIAG> D 162.9 = l), the unit itself must delete the
OVERFLOW when it reads the next message.
If the read pointer catches up with the write pointer, the read
pointer remains on the last message field and reads this out via
FB 67 repeatedly when requested (ID: last message) until the
write pointer moves on.

Principle: read pointer = write pointer 1st field (2nd priority)

In this case, a diagnostic unit can only evaluate a message again
when the content (write pointer) has changed.

Notes on Installation and Testing

Notes on installation and Testing

8.1

Fast Version

8.1.l

List of Some Basic

Errors
Descrivtion of error
PLC changed to STOP

Possible causes

1 Wrong blocks loaded (see section)

SB was called directly in a block. (The SB

call must not be programmed, since the
current SB is called by a standard FB.)
SB 2 or SB 3 not on PLC
User DB not in PLC RAM
Wrone FB number entered in the ID screen
INIT steps not set

l SB not on PLC
l
1 User DB. diagnostic DB not in PLC RAM 1
SB not programmed in GRAPH 5
User DB not regenerated after correction or
not transferred to PLC
Step 0 not set after booting:
remedy: apply pulse to parameter AUS and
restart with AUTO

1 Dis~lav:check working DB
Modes cannot be implemented

Software PG - software PLC does not match

SB not on PLC
SB not programmed in GRAPH 5
User DB not in PLC RAM
Wrong standard blocks loaded
Input and output side of FB 72, FB 73,
FB 74 not correctlv vroerammed

Mode AUTO and output

command = 0

Check the interlock conditions in the AUTO

routine
Mode interlock between FB 74 and FB 72 or
FB 73 ignored

Notes on installation and Testing

1 Descriation of error

1 Error in modes of FB 74

1 Possible causes

FB 74 not called directly before FB 72 or

FB 73
When using interrupt processing (OB 2, ...,
OB 13,..., OB 20, OB 21, OB 22, OB 23...)
the flag area FW 200 to 254 used by
GRAPH 5 is not saved and reloaded

Sporadic errors

8.1.2

Examples for
Estimating the
Processing Times

The tables contain the maximum values of measured times in

milliseconds.

Total cycle times when using FB 72 or FB 73 separately

The times shown in the examples include the following block
calls:
OB1

+=

PBX

+=

FB72

+=

SBx

OB 1

+=

PB X

+=

FB 73

+=

SB X

SB2
(simultaneous)
+= SB 3 (linear)
+=

When measuring the program execution times, the worst case was
selected in which all step enabling conditions are fulfilled and the
sequencers switch simultaneously in every cycle and to all
branches. Each step of a sequencer consisted of three binary
assignments and each transition of three binary scans.

Notes on installation and Testing

Table of program execution times for the SS-95

Table of program execution times for the SS-100U (CPU 103)

simultaneous branches

simultaneous branches

Notes on installation and Testing

Table of program execution times for the SS-115U (CPU 941B)

Table of program execution times for the SS-115U (CPU 942B)

simultaneous branches

simultaneous branches

Notes on installation and Testing

Table of program execution times for the SS-115U (CPU 943B)

Table of program execution times for the SS-115U (CPU 944B)

simultaneous branches

simultaneous branches

Notes on installation and Testing

Table of program execution times for the SS-115U (CPU 945)

Table of program execution times for the SS-135U (CPU 922)

simultaneous branches

simultaneous branches

Notes on installation and Testing

Table of program execution times for the SS-135U (CPU 928B)

Table of program execution times for the SS-150s

simultaneous branches

simultaneous branches

Notes on installation and Testing

Table of program execution times for the SS-155U

(CPU 9461947)

simultaneous branches

simultaneous branches

Table of program execution times for the SS-155U (CPU 948)

Notes on installation and Testing

Total cycle times with a combination of FB 72 or FB 73 with

FB 74
The times specified in the examples include the following block
calls:
OB 1

+=

PBX

+=

FB 74PB 72

+=

SB X

+=

OB 1

+=

PB X

+=

FB 74PB 73

+=

SB X

+=

SB 2
(simultaneous)
SB 3 (linear)

When measuring the program execution times, the worst case was
selected in which all step enabling conditions are fulfilled and the
sequencers switch simultaneously in every cycle and to all
branches. Each step of a sequencer consisted of three binary
assignments and each transition of three binary scans.

Notes on installation and Testing

Table of program execution times for the SS-95

Table of program execution times for the SS-100U (CPU 103)

simultaneous branches

simultaneous branches

Notes on installation and Testing

Table of program execution times for the SS-115U (CPU 941B)

Table of program execution times for the SS-115U (CPU 942B)

simultaneous branches

simultaneous branches

Notes on installation and Testing

Table of program execution times for the SS-115U (CPU 943B)

Table of program execution times for the SS-115U (CPU 944B)

simultaneous branches

simultaneous branches

Notes on installation and Testing

Table of program execution times for the SS-115U (CPU 945)

Table of program execution times for the SS-135U (CPU 922)

simultaneous branches

simultaneous branches

Notes on installation and Testing

Table of program execution times for the SS-135U (CPU 928B)

Table of program execution times for the SS-150s

simultaneous branches

simultaneous branches

Notes on installation and Testing

Table of program execution times for the SS-155U

(CPU 9461947)

simultaneous branches

simultaneous branches

Table of program execution times for the SS-155U (CPU 948)

Notes on installation and Testing

8.2

Standard Version

8.2.1

List of Some Basic

Errors

The following table lists some of the possible errors which can
lead to incorrect processing of the sequencer.

1 Descriotion of error

1 Possible causes

PLC changed to STOP

Wrong blocks loaded (see section)

SB was called directly in a block. (The SB
call must not be programmed, since the
current SB is called by a standard FB).
SB 0 not on PLC

WIT steps are not set

1 User DB not generated

1
1 Wrong DB number entered in ID screen form 1
l SB not on PLC
l
Diagnostic DB not in PLC RAM

1 SB is not programmed in GRAPH 5

+

1 Dis~lav:check working DB
Modes cannot be implemented

check the status bits in the ZUST word

User DB not regenerated after correction or

not transferred to PLC

Software PG - software PLC does not match

SB not on PLC
User DB, diagnostic DB not in PLC RAM
SB is not programmed in GRAPH 5
+ check the status bits in the ZUST word
Wrong standard block loaded

1 Input side and output side of FB 70171 not 1

correctly programmed

Flag for N-ST used elsewhere or I used

instead of F
Mode AUTO and output
comment = 0

Check the interlock conditions in the AUTO

routine

Several sequencers on PLC,

however, only one running

Parameter N-ST in FB 70 assigned the same

signal for all sequencers

Notes on installation and Testing

1 Descriation of error

1 Possible causes

Sporadic error

When using interrupt processing (OB 2, ...,

OB 1 3,..., OB 20, OB 21, OB 22, OB 23...),
the flag area FW 200 to 254 used by
GRAPH 5 is not saved and reloaded

The sequencer is in step X

according to the overview
display, the zoom-in, however,
cannot be activated

is programmed as a selective step

Step (X-l)
containing double-word commands

When sub-sequences are called,

the sub-sequence signals the
end of the sequence without it
having started

No waiting time assigned for step with

sub-sequence call

Start input for FB 71 not assigned

correctly

Notes on installation and Testing

8.2.2

Examples for
Estimating the
Processing Times

The tables contain the maximum values of measured times in

milliseconds.

Total cycle times

The times shown in the examples include the following block
calls:
OB1 + P B X

+FB70+

S B x + SBO

When measuring the program execution times, the worst case was
selected in which all step enabling conditions are fulfilled and the
sequencers switch simultaneously in every cycle and to all
branches. Each step of a sequencer consisted of three binary
assignments and each transition of three binary scans.

Notes on installation and Testing

Table of program execution times for the SS-100U (CPU 103)

Table of program execution times for the SS-115U (CPU 941B)

simultaneous branches

simultaneous branches

Notes on installation and Testing

Table of program execution times for the SS-115U (CPU 942B)

Table of program execution times for the SS-115U (CPU 943B)

simultaneous branches

simultaneous branches

Notes on installation and Testing

Table of program execution times for the SS-115U (CPU 944B)

Table of program execution times for the SS-115U (CPU 945)

simultaneous branches

simultaneous branches

Notes on installation and Testing

Table of program execution times for the SS-135U (CPU 922)

Table of program execution times for the SS-135U (CPU 928B)

simultaneous branches

simultaneous branches

Notes on installation and Testing

Table of program execution times for the SS-150s

Table of program execution times for the SS-155U

(CPU 9461947)

Notes on installation and Testing

Table of program execution times for the SS-155U (CPU 948)

Total number of steps per sequencer

1 Sequencer structure

1
1
1

Linear sequence

2 simultaneous branches
4 simultaneous branches

8 simultaneous branches

25

50

75

100

Notes on installation and Testing

Comparison of the Fast Version with the Standard Version

8.3

Comparison of the Fast Version with the Standard Version

Differences between FB 72, FB 73 (fast version) and FB 70
(standard version)

TIPP

AUTO active without any activation,

interlocked with TIPP

Must be activated with B-UE

HAND as for FB 70, however, pending

timeout STO is not deleted

STO is deleted

EXECUTE

SSMB, must be activated with B-UE

STO deleted in EXECUTE

active without any activation

interlocked with AUTO
timeout STO due to elapsed TM

T+1

as for FB 70
effective in AUTO and TIPP
as for FB 70

effective in AUTO and SSMB

Waiting time

effective in AUTO and TIPP

only in AUTO

STO

in AUTO and TIPP

only in AUTO

QIT

in AUTO: as for FB 70

r
r
Monitoring time

switch over AUTO to MAN

( N H = 0)
STO remains 1, if QIT = 1 all timeouts
can be deleted

timeout STO is deleted

without QIT

in TIPP: STO can be deleted with

transition = 1 and QIT, with T+1 switch
to next step

STO is deleted in TIPP (SSMB)

Parameter1
function

1 DIAG

not possible, diagnostic DB does not

need to be loaded on the PLC

DIMOS 85

as for FB 70

l SANW

FB 74 necessary, all steps of the

sequencer can be setlreset; structure of
the sequencer must be kept to, otherwise
error when switching to AUTORIPP

1 SLOE

not possible

1 Step indication

:;ordinate

mode

1 Timeout

diagnosis with programmers

step number read out from DW 20 to 27

see Section 4.5.6.
logical connection of the parameters
A/H and TIPP,
see programming examples no. 2, 3, 4, 5

UBET

step number of the steps with timeout

read out from DW 225,
see Section 4.5.4.

SSTO

Simultaneous branches
active

from DW 20 to 27,
see program example no. 14

Status word

scan internal flag,

see program example no. 15

Synchronization

FB 74 parameter SYN

not possible

not possible

implemented by FB 71

1 ZUST

Blocks and PLC

8.4

Blocks and PLC

The following table shows which standard blocks can be used on
which CPU.

SS-100U
CPU 100
CPU 102
CPU 103

SS-11SU
CPU 941
CPU 942
CPU 943
CPU 944
CPU 945

SS-13SU
CPU 922
CPU 928
CPU 928B

SS-1SOU
CPU 9261927

SS-1SSU
CPU 9461947
CPU 948

Notes on installation and Testing

8.5

Compatibility with Earlier Releases

Points to note
about SBS and FBS

The standard blocks and the SBsPBs generated by the PG

software are tailored to each other's needs. This means that only
certain combinations are permitted. The following three
procedures are possible:
Continue use of previously created sequencers
It is possible to continue using sequencers created with the PG
software GRAPH 51Stage V and supported by standard blocks.
However, all the sequencers on the CPU must use these versions.
Status enquiries or modifications are only possible with the PG
software GRAPH 5 Stage V. You can either use a PG with the
Stage V software or switch over to your GRAPH 51Stage V
package within the basic Stage V1 package using the menu item
change.
Porting old sequencers to Stage V1
The PG package GRAPH 51Stage V1 recognizes both old and new
GRAPH 5 blocks. When an old block is recognized, it is
automatically converted to a new (Stage VI) block following a
prompt for confirmation. Following this, the DB must be
regenerated and the standard blocks exchanged.
Since Stage V1 blocks are longer than Stage V blocks, porting
may, in some cases, not be possible (SB block length > 3000
words). Here, the block must be shortened by deleting stepslstep
zoom-ins.

The changeover must be made for the whole CPU.

Creating new blocks in the Stage V1 environment.
Here, you must simple make sure that there is no
GRAPH 51Stage V program on the CPU for which a new
sequencer is to be programmed.

Compatibility with Earlier Releases

Innovations in GRAPH 5/11

New diagnostic package

see Chapter 6

Automatic process synchronization

see Chapter 5

Response to timeouts

see Chapter 6

Multistep zoom-in

see Chapter 4

Modes of the sequencer can also be

controlled via the user DB

see Chapter 7

Data written to data blocks

see Chapter 7

Timers can be re-triggered; time plan

selected by user

see Section 4.9

(FB 75)

Switching to next step in the same PLC

cycle
User interface adapted to basic package STEP 5 V 6.x
Monitoring window TMJTM-MIN
Combination of the previous two descriptions
GRAPH 5 (6ES5998-1SA01)
Standard function blocks (C79000-G8563-C587)
Separation of manuaVautomatic in the step zoom-ins for:
1. Operating the system
2. Displaying the criteria analysis
Printing:

Step and transition are printed out directly one

after the other

Initial timer value can be input

Appendix

Appendix

9.1

Abbreviations
The following list contains the most common SIMATIC S5 abbreviations. It does not, however, include softkey labels since these
are explained in software help texts.

A
ABS
AS 511

absolute addressing, e.g. I 1.0

AS 511 interface module for connection to PLC

B
B
BE

block
block end

C
C
COM
CORR
CPU
CSF

D
D
DB
DBDO.nnn
DC
DCX
DIR
DSP ABS
DSP SYM
DOCFILE

counter
comment key
correction key
central processing unit
control system flowchart, graphic representation
of an automation task complying with
DIN 40 700 / DIN 40 719

data (1 bit)
data block
documentation block for data block DB
comment block for data block DB
comment block for data block DX
directory of contents of hard disk,
diskette, PLC, EPROM and files
presets screen, display operands in absolute form
presets screen, display operands in absolute form
documentation file, e.g. for plant comments

Abbreviations
data word (16 bit)
documentation block for data block DX
extended data block

E
EPROM
EEPROM
F
F, FY
FW, FD
FB
FBDO.nnn
FC
FCX
FD
FlexOS
FV
FVX
FXDO.nnn
EX

G
GRAPH 5

erasable programmable read only memory

electrically erasable programmable read only memory

flag bit, flag byte

flag word, flag double word
function block
documentation block for function block FB
comment block for function block FB
comment block for function block EX
default program file on floppy disk
(also stands for hard disk)
operating system
block preheader for FB
block preheader for EX
documentation block for function block EX
extended function block

software package for configuring and programming

sequencers in a clear graphical representation

I
ID screen

sequencer identification screen form

K
KOMI

command interpreter

L
LAD

LEN
LIB

ladder diagram, graphic representation

of the automation task with symbols of circuit
diagrams complying with DIN 19239
length of a block
library number

Appendix

organization block
documentation block for organization block
comment block for organization block
extended peripheral word
extended peripheral byte

PG
PI1
PIQ
PLC
PW
PY

R
RAM
REW

program block
documentation block for program block
personal computer (in some screen forms
also PLC owing to lack of space) and
comment block for program block
programmer
process image of the inputs
process image of the outputs
programmable logic controller
peripheral word
peripheral byte

RLO

random access memory

rewire, rename inputs and
outputs in the user program
(XRF, COMP, REW package)
result of logic operation (status bit)

S
S
SAC
SB
SBDO.nnn
SC
SINEC H1
STA

S flag , extended flag area

step address counter
sequence block
documentation block for sequence block
comment block for sequence block
bus system, network for industrial application
status (status bit)

Abbreviations
programming language for programming
SIMATIC S5 programmable logic controllers
statement list, STEP 5 method of representation as
STL
series of abbreviations of PLC commands
(complies with DIN 19239)
SYM
symbolic addressing, e.g. -INPUT
SYSID
block for system identification
SS-KOMI
S5 command interpreter
SS-DOSJMT S5 operating system (multitasking capability)
STEP 5

T
T
TM
TW
X
XRF

timer
monitoring time
waiting time

cross reference list (from XRF, COMP, REW

package)

Appendix

Glossary

9.2

Glossary

Active step

A step in the sequencer is active, when its actions are being

executed.

Actual value

The actual value or refresh value provides the current state of

timeouts of a step or transition with regard to changes which have
taken place since the first occurrence.
By comparing the initial value and the refresh value, you can
check whether changes occurred between these points in time. The
refresh value is not stored but overwritten when the screen is
updated.

Configuration
editor

The "configuration editor" screen form is a PG function for

GRAPH 5 Diagnosis to connect the PG and PLC (path and path
name). After clicking on the menu items "Group diagnosis", "SB
list" or "Messages", the "configuration editor" screen form is
opened. In the screen form, you can specify up to 4 path names
for the connection to the PLC to be monitored simultaneously.

Criteria analysis

Criteria analysis is a GRAPH 5 diagnostic function for the

analysis of part of a sequencer with a timeout (stepltransition,
MSZ) on the PLC. The function investigates why an action was
not executed.
Criteria analysis information is available when the diagnostic
program has found outputs that are not set or input scans that
were unfulfilled in the stepsltransitions with a timeout.
If several steps and transitions have a timeout, you must select the
step or transition of interest in a window before starting criteria
analysis.

Data buffer DB
DB <DIAG>

This DB is used as a data buffer (FIE0 principle) until a PG reads

the information. It is generated temporarily by EB 69 with the DB
number diagnosis DB + 1.The length of the DB depends on the
number of entries in the parameter data DB.

Appendix

Diagnosis DB
DB <GB:DIAG>

This block is the GRAPH-5 diagnosis data block for criteria

analysis. It is generated with the PG function DB-GEN and is
valid for all SBs in the program file.

Direct connection

With a direct connection via the AS 511 the path name DIRECT
CONNECTION is entered.

Initial value

GRAPH 5 Diagnosis distinguishes between initial value and

actual value (refresh value). The initial value message indicates
and stores the situation as it was after block execution in the cycle
in which the timeout first occurred. Only the initial value is
buffered. The current state of the timeout (actual value) indicates
the situation with regard to changes that have taken place since
the first occurrence.
With the initial value (state at the time a timeout occurred and was
detected) and refresh value (state at the time of the refresh
request), you can check the changes that have taken place between
these two points in time. Refresh values are not buffered.

Input mode

The "Step sequence overview" screen form is a PG function for

GRAPH 5 Diagnosis. This screen has two modes, the input mode
and the polling mode. In this screen form, up to 3 timeouts per
screen page are displayed. The currently selected timeout is
displayed inversely. All input relates to this message and the SB it
describes. In the input mode there is no cyclic scanning (polling).

FB 67
Read data

FB 67 is called by FB 69 and is responsible for the correct

reading of a message from DB<DIAG> to DB<GS:DIAG>.
This block must simply be transferred to the PLC.

FB 68
Write data

FB 68 is called by FB 69 and is responsible for the correct entry

of a message from DB<GS:DIAG> to DB<DIAG>.
This block must simply be transferred to the PLC.

Glossary
FB 69
Diagnosis

FB 69 organizes and controls diagnosis in conjunction with FB 67

and FB 68.
FB 69 consists of executable program and an operation and
monitoring section.
This block must be transferred with the assigned DB<GS:PARA>
and integrated in the cyclic program.

Flag 233.1

The flag F 233.1 represents the result of the automatically

generated synchronization condition. The evaluation result of
positive and negative synchronization conditions depends on the
RLO at the end of the supplementary condition.

Group diagnosis

The difference between single and group diagnosis is that in group

diagnosis up to 4 PLCs can be monitored at the same time and in
single diagnosis only one PLC.
In group diagnosis the PG is connected to the PLC via a bus.

Initial step

This becomes active as the 1st step when a sequencer is started

without any conditions being scanned or after a jump to S 0
during cyclic operation.

Login group
diagnosis

If you want to monitor sequencers in more than one PLC, you

must first inform the PG of the connections (path, path name) to
the PLC. You edit this connection in the configuration editor and
store it in the configuration file (config. file). After the connection
has been entered, the PG establishes the connections and displays
them in the "Login group diagnosis".

Message

Menu in GRAPH 5 Diagnosis for selecting the "step sequence

diagnosis" screen form. Here, all the current messages about steps
with timeouts are displayed. The messages are detected by cyclic
reading of the diagnosis DB. A message consists of all individual
messages belonging to an SB.
The messages function outputs the timeout messages of all
monitored SBs in detail on the screen or printer. An SB listed in
the overview can be further investigated if there is a timeout
(criteria analysis).

Appendix

Message
group timeout

This indicates that at least one SB on a monitored PLC has a

timeout. This means that a timeout message must have arrived at
the PG.
When an SB has a timeout, but there is no message entered in the
message buffer, "no message in message buffer" is displayed at
the top of the screen instead of the message information.

Monitoring time
(TM/TM-MIN)

The monitoring time (TM) is the time within which the step
enabling conditions for next step must become active and the
sequencer must switch on to the next step before the time has
elapsed. If this is not the case, a timeout message is output. The
monitoring time is evaluated automatically by the standard
function blocks for the modes.

Multiple candidates

Multiple candidates means that the group of possible

synchronization steps following a synchronization run consists of
more than one step. This occurs in the following situations:
-

steps describing basic settings in which no actions are executed

multistep zoom-ins (MSZ)

Multistep zoom-in
(M=)

Amultistep zoom-in is a step containing actions assigned to all or

to selected steps.
Instead of step numbers, the MSZ has letters. The names of the
MSZs (SLA, SLB ... ) are assigned in alphabetical order when
they are generated.
MSZs are run through in alphabetical order once all the steps have
been processed.
For an MSZ, only the positive synchronization condition can be
initialized, since there is no follow-on transition to provide the
end condition for the negative synchronization condition.
Multiple candidates for the synchronization step can be avoided
by using supplementary negative synchronization conditions in the
steps.

Network

Connection of several computers (PC, PG, PLC) via interface

modules, a physical line and appropriate software to allow data
exchange between the computers.

Glossary
Operating screen

The operating screen is a PG function for GRAPH 5 Diagnosis. It

is divided into a display section (HW op. screen) and an operating
section (PG op. field). Both sections are the simulation of the FB
being used, shown in the CSF method of representation in the
polling mode. The status of every parameter is displayed in the
polling mode.
In the display section, the signal states of the hardware VOs is
displayed.
In the software operating field, parameters can be assigned to the
progradcall interface of FB (FB 70 ... FB 74. The operating
screen is called with F1 (New par) in the screen form "Step
sequence overview", "Step sequence diagnosis" or "Criteria
analysis".

Overview level

The structure of the sequencer is established at the overview level

(steps, transitions, simultaneous, alternative branches).

Parameter data DB
DB <GB:PARA>

This DB contains 20 DWs with parameter data. You must edit this
DB. The defaults can be found in Section 6.3 "Preparing the
Diagnostic Program" and Section 7.3 "Assignment of the
GRAPH 5 Diagnostic Parameters".

Appendix

Permanent step

The programmed actions are executed depending on the RLO. All

the steps of the sequencer are run through cyclically even if the
step is not active. The operations to be executed in a permanent
step are controlled by the RLO.
The RLO is set by the first command of a step stored under
GRAPH 5: "A F 233.0". Commands independent of the RLO are
always executed, RLO-dependent commands only when the
RLO=l.

Note
Flag 233.0 is set by the previous transition. If the transition
is not fulfilled, then flag 233.0 = 0 and if the transition is
fulfilled, flag 233.0 = 1.
Polling mode

The "Step sequence overview" screen form is a PG function for

GRAPH 5 Diagnosis. This screen form has 2 modes: the polling
mode and the input mode. The status of every parameter is
displayed in the polling mode:
a) there is no timeout:
a moving asterisk on the screen indicates that diagnosis is
active
b) there is a timeout:
the timeout message and softkey menu are displayed

Presets

Screen form with the parameters for the current STEP 5 package.
With the function DB-GEN the maximum number that can be
assigned for the diagnosis DB id 254, since the number of the
data buffer DB (DB<DIAG)> = number of the diagnosis DB plus
1 @B<G5: DIAG>).
This DB number must therefore be kept free.

Principle of
process
synchronization

A positive and a negative synchronization condition is formed for

every step. An active step and an unfulfilled transition mean that
synchronization is possible.

Glossary
Process
synchronization

If the process control program and the process status are no longer
consistent due to a timeout or an intervention, they must be
resynchronized with each other. Using automatic process
synchronization the step in a linear sequence corresponding to the
process status can switched active (Chapter 5 Process
synchronization).

Refresh value

See actual value.

SB<EXECUTE>

SB 0 (with FB 70/71), SB 2 (with FB 72), SB 3 (with FB 73)

SB list

SB list is a menu in GRAPH 5 Diagnosis for selecting the "Step

sequence overview" screen form.
The "Step sequence overview" displays the status of the
sequencers on the selected PLC. An SB listed in the overview can
be further investigated if there is a timeout (criteria analysis).
SB-sync must always be called by the user (e.g. in OB 1 or the
user PB) (JU SB-sync). Once synchronization has been started,
this block is executed and determines the number of possible
synchronization steps. SB 5 detects whether there are multiple
candidates or a single candidate and if there is only one possible
step, this is set to active.

Segment

Division of a SIMATIC STEP 5 block.

Selective step

The action part of a selective step is only processed when the step
is active. If the step is not active, the action part is skipped.

Appendix

Sequence block

A sequence block (SB) is a STEP 5 block. There are two types of

sequence blocks:
1. Sequence blocks in the LAD; CSF; STL package. These are
like program blocks and contain user program or parts of it in the
form of STEP 5 commands (basic operations) and possible
comments.
2. Sequence blocks in the GRAPH 5 package. These are a special
type of sequence block for sequential control. They contain the
configured sequencer in the form of sequential steps, step enabling
conditions (transitions) and branches. The steps and transitions in
these blocks contain the user program in the form of STEP 5
commands and possible comments.

Sequencer

A controller which runs through a sequence of steps, one step switching to the next step according to programmed conditions.

Sequencer
diagnosis

Current messages from sequencers with a timeout are displayed in

the "Step sequence diagnosis" screen form.
The screen form has two modes:
1. Polling mode with cyclic scanning. The only softkey available
is F1 (Inp mode) to change to the input mode.
2. Input mode to select various displays and to change to the
operating screen form.

Single candidate

Single candidate means that a synchronization run with any

program status and process status will always produce one
synchronization step only. (The group of possible synchronization
steps consists of exactly one step.)
Note. an empty step cannot be the synchronization step with
automatically generated synchronization conditions since no
outputs are set in them.

Single diagnosis

Single diagnosis means that the sequencer of a PLC is monitored,

timeouts are diagnosed and signalled.

Glossary
Status recognition

The aim of status recognition is the identification of program steps

in a sequencer. Process synchronization can only use signals
exchanged between the process and control program for status
recognition. This means that only the signal values of the inputs
and outputs can be used. Flags, timers and counters are internal
signals which are not transferred to the process. To be able to use
signals for the automatic status recognition, the following
conditions must be met:
The value of the signal must allow conclusions to be made about
the process status.

Maximum monitoring time

Here, a check is made to determine whether the step enabling conditions for the next step became active within the set monitoring
time TM. Before TM elapses, the sequencer must have moved on
to the next step, otherwise a timeout message is output. As an alternative, you can use TM as a minimum monitoring time.
Implementing a minimum monitoring time. With FB parameter
assignment (see Section 4.3.5) you arrange for TW to be interpreted as a minimum monitoring time TM-MIN. In this case, a check
is made to establish whether the step enabling conditions for the
next step are fulfilled before the time elapses. If this is the case,
an error message is displayed.
TW and TM can have different values in every step. They are programmed simply by entering the time values. The time function
does not need to be scanned in the next transition but is evaluated
automatically by the standard function blocks for modes.

Step

A step is part of the sequencer and describes the actions executed

by the controller in a certain status. The actions of a step are programmed at the zoom-in level in STEP 5.

Sub-sequence

Sub-sequences are treated as further main sequences in process

synchronization. They have their own SB-sync, whose SB number
must not match that of the main sequence.

Appendix

Switching
transition

A transition switches further when it is valid and the step enabling

conditions are fulfilled. Switching means that the transition terminates previous step(s) and activates the next step(s).

Symbols file

Assignment list stored in a file.

Synchronization
conditions

Synchronization conditions are implemented by assigning a

positive and a negative synchronization condition in every step of
the sequencer. These conditions determine whether a step can be
active or not.
The automatically generated end condition for the action
programmed in the previous step is formed from all the input
signals within a transition and is for automatic generation of the
synchronization conditions. The logically combined input signals
are used (A I, 0 I).
The synchronization conditions are structured as follows:
1. Positive synchronization condition,
generated automatically
2. Negative synchronization condition,
generated automatically
3. Supplementary, positive synchronization condition,
can be generated manually (Section 5.3).
4. Supplementary, negative synchronization condition,
can be generated manually (Section 5.3).
All the synchronization conditions of a sequence block are put
together to form a separate block, SB-sync. The method of
representation of the synchronization conditions at the zoom-in
level is the same as in the steps.

Transition

A transition is part of the sequencer and contains the step enabling

conditions with which the sequencer changes from one status to
the next. The step enabling conditions are programmed at the
zoom-in level in STEP 5.
A transition is valid when its previous step(s) is (are) active. A
transition switches when it is valid and the step enabling conditions are fulfilled. Switching means that the transition terminates
the previous step(s) and activates the next step(s).
Transitions are always processed selectively.

Glossary
Valid transition

A transition is valid when the previous step(s) is (are) active.

Working DB
DB<GB:sequence>

Working DB for the sequence block with the same number. This is
generated when DB-GEN is executed, i.e. the number is generated
automatically.

Zoom-in level

The content of the steps and transitions are programmed at the

zoom-in level using STEP 5 and the zoom-in function. Their
status is also displayed at this level.

Appendix

S5 File Types

9.3

S5 File Types

S5 files

The basic package creates so-called S5 files. There are several

types of S5 file. Elements you have generated are stored as
follows:
- Blocks in PROGRAM files of the type ST.S5D,
- Assignment lists in SYMBOLS files of the type ZO.INI and
Zl.IN1,
- Footers in FOOTER files of the type F1.INI and F2.IN1,
- Printer parameters in PRINTER files of the type DR.IN1 etc.
These file types can be distinguished by the file types indicated in
the last 2 characters of the name and the extension. The whole file
name of an S5 file is a maximum of 8 plus 3 characters, of which
the user can only select the first 6 characters. These are known as
the file name.
The following page provides you with an overview of the S5 files
and their file types.

Appendix

Further Reading

9.4

Further Reading
Siemens specialist publications
Berger, Hans
Automating with the SIMATIC S5-155U
Order no. A19100-L531-F177-X-7600
Berger, Hans
Automating with the SIMATIC S5-135U
Order no. A19100-L531-F50.5-X-7600
Berger, Hans
Automating with the SIMATIC S5-115U
Order no. A19100-L531-F153-X-7600

Siemens manuals
STEP 5 Manual
Order no. C79000-G8576-C140
GRAPH 5
Standard Function Blocks
S5-115U, S5-135U, S5-150U, S5-155U Programmable Controllers
Order no. C79000-G8563-C587
GRAPH 5-EDDI
Standard Function Blocks
S5-115U, S5-135U, S5-150U, S5-155U Programmable Controllers
Order no. C79000-G8574-C697

Appendix

FlexOS
Order no. 6EA9200-OAA10-OABO
PCPJM-86
Order no. 6ES5 998-2SA21

You will find further programming examples and instructions in

the programmable controller manuals and the optional packages.

9.5

Index

A
Active step
9-7
Actual value
9-7 - 9-8
Additional functions
4-139
Additional synchronization condition
evaluation
5-47
Alternative branch
closing
4-47
opening
4-46
Alternative branch
2-16
Alternative sequence
4-37
Assignment editor
4-74
Assignment list
example powder press
4-172
B
Block
creating
not storing
storing
Branch
deleting

4-35
4-59 - 4-60
4-59 - 4-60
4-31

C
Call diagram
FB 70
4-3
FB 70171
4-6
FB 72
4-4
FB 73
4-5
Call strategy
process synchronization
5-13
Call structure
4-79
Comment
2-22, 4-27, 4-57 - 4-58
key
4-23
zoom-in level
4-27
Configuration editor
6-22, 9-7
Copying
4-58
direct
4-58

indirect
4-58
Correction
4-30
key
4-23
overview level
4-30
zoom-in level
4-30
Criteria analysis
6-27, 6-31 - 6-32, 9-7
multistep zoom-in
6-32
screen form
6-32
step
6-31
transition
6-33
Cursor
positioning
4-22
Cyclic program
process synchronization
5-24

D
Data block
generating
4-13, 4-76, 4-178
Data buffer DB
9-7
Data interface
process synchronization
5-29
DB DIAG
9-7
9-8
DB G5:DIAG
9-11
DB G5:PARA
5-26
DB G5:SEQUENCE
DB-GEN
4-13, 6-15, 9-12
Defaults
process synchronization
5-14
Delete
4-31
branch
4-31
jump
4-31
4-31
step
4-31
transition
4-31
Delete key
Diagnosis
2-12, 4-76, 6-5
Diagnosis DB
4-178, 9-8
9-12
number
Diagnostic program
6-18
Direct connection
6-27, 9-8
4-24
Display mode

Appendix

key
Documentation
Dynamic synchronization

4-22
2-11
5-4

E
Editing mode
4-21
Empty steps
4-75
Empty transitions
4-75
End condition
5-16
transition
5-16
Example
calling FB 72
4-79
powder press
2-9 - 2-10, 4-165
process synchronization
5-31
synchronization condition
5-37
Exchange
direct
4-57
indirect
4-57
zoom-in content
4-57
Expansions
4-11
F
Fast version
4-14, 4-37, 4-91
FB 67
6-12, 9-8
FB 68
6-12, 9-8
FB 69
6-12, 9-9
FB 69 diagnosis
9-9
FB 70
4-37
operating screen form
6-35
4-37
FB 70171
FB 71
4-37
FB 72
FB 73
FB 78
Field length
Flag 233.0
Flag 233.1
Flag area
Flip-flop

1.

G
GRAPH 5-EDDI
Group diagnosis
configuration editor

6-22, 9-7

ID screen
5-14
ID screen form
4-36
Inconsistency
5-2
Initial step
2-18, 4-8, 4-53, 9-9
Initial value
6-27, 9-8
Initial value message
6-27, 9-8
Input
aborting
4-59 - 4-60
completing
4-59, 4-67
terminating
4-60
Input mode
6-25, 9-8
Input signal
process synchronization
5-6, 9-16
Input status
5-2

installation
Interlock
J

Jump
deleting
direct
indirect
Jump commands
Jump to SO

K
Key
CORR
delete
double arrow keys rightlleft
half screen
zoom-in
zoom-in level

2-17, 4-48
4-31
4-48
4-48
4-48
4-48

4-23
4-24
4-25
4-24
4-26
4-23

L
Library number
Linear sequence
Logic control systems
Login
group diagnosis
M
Main sequence
4-7, 4-81
Manual operation
5-25
sequencer
Message
9-9
group timeout
6-27, 9-10
STOPPED
4-89
Minimum configuration
4-11
Mode
4-65
output
Modes
4-129 - 4-130, 4-147
Monitoring time
2-22, 4-57 - 4-58,
4-177, 9-10
displaying
4-89
4-177
entering
maximum
2-22, 4-9, 4-50, 9-15
minimum
2-22, 4-9, 4-50, 9-15
MSZ
4-68,4-184
correcting
4-71
creating
4-68
see multistep zoom-in
5-8, 9-10
Multiple candidates
avoiding
5-8
multistep zoom-in
5-17, 9-10
Multistep zoom-in
4-7, 9-10
criteria analysis
6-32
multiple candidates
5-17, 9-10
status recognition
5-11
synchronization
5-11
synchronization condition
5-17

N
Negative synchronization
5-10, 5-19, 5-37
condition
additional
5-20
Nesting
4-81
Network
9-10
Number of possible steps
determining
reducing

0
Operand comment
Operating
FB 72/FB 73
Operating screen
Operating screen form
FB 70
FB 71
FB 74
softkey
Operating section
Output mode
Output signal
process synchronization
Overview
structure
Overview level
completing input
programming
status display
terminating input
P
Parallel branch
Parameter data DB
Parameters
for FB 70
for FB 71
for FB 72
for FB 73

Appendix
for FB 74
4-97
for FB 75
4-141
Parameters for the FBs
4-16
Permanent step
4-8, 4-53, 9-12
Polling mode
6-26, 6-29, 9-12
Positive synchronization
condition
5-9, 5-18, 5-38, 5-43
additional
5-20
Powder press
example
2-9, 4-165
Presets
9-12
Printing a program
4-180
Printout
2-11
Procedure
process synchronization
5-5
Process control program
5-2, 9-13
Process status
5-5
inconsistency
5-2, 9-13
Process synchronization
call strategy
5-13
cyclic program
5-24
data interface
5-29
data word
5-26
defaults
5-14
DW 33
5-26
dynamic
5-4
end condition
5-16
example
5-31
flag 233.1
5-17, 9-9
input signal
5-6, 9-16
multiple candidates
9-10
output signal
5-5
principle
5-2, 9-12
procedure
5-5
restricting multiple candidates
5-43
rules
5-4
selection algorithm
5-6
sequencer
5-2, 9-13
single candidate
9-14

softkeys
static
status recognition
sub-sequence
transition, rules
Product information
Program
printing
transferring
Program structure
Programming the OB
Project planning

R
Re-translation
Re-translation list
deleting
generating
Refresh value
Rewiring
Rules
process synchronization

5-15
5-4
5-5, 9-15
5-6, 5-14, 9-15
5-4
1-2
4-180
4-87, 4-178
2-23
4-16
4-165
4-77
4-78
4-77
9-13
4-78
5-4

S
SO
4-49
S5 file
9-19
Saving
synchronization condition
5-13
4-178
SB 0
SB execute
2-23, 4-37, 9-13
SB list
9-13
SB-sync
5-26, 9-13
Screen form
configuration editor
6-22, 9-7
logging in for group diagnosis 6-23
operating screen with FB 70
6-35
operating screen with FB 71
6-36
operating screen with
6-37
FB 72/FB 73
operating screen with FB 74
6-38
step
6-28

step sequence diagnosis

9-14
step sequence overview
6-25
Scrolling
4-22
Search
4-55
for operand
4-56
process synchronization
5-14
synchronization condition
5-14
Segment
9-13
appending
4-66
deleting
4-67
inserting
4-65
Segment comment
4-27, 4-29
copying
4-58
exchanging
4-57
Segment title
4-27 - 4-28
copying
4-58
exchanging
4-57
4-37
Select FB
Selection algorithm
process synchronization
5-6
Selection screen
criteria analysis
6-26
Selective step
2-18, 4-8, 4-54, 9-13
in the cycle
4-54
step flag
4-54
Sequence
end
4-49
Sequence block
9-14
printing
4-78
Sequencer
2-5, 4-39, 9-14
creating
4-7, 4-21
elements
2-19
entering
4-12
loading
4-19
manual operation
5-25
process synchronization
9-13
starting
4-19, 4-39
status display
4-87 - 4-88
structure
2-19

Sequencer diagnosis
9-14
Sequential control system
2-2
Signal value
5-5
Simultaneous branch
2-15
closing
4-45
opening
4-44
Simultaneous sequence
4-37
Single candidate
5-8, 9-14
Single diagnosis
6-7, 9-14
Softkey
group diagnosis screen
6-24
operating screen form
6-34
step sequence diagnosis screen 6-29
step sequence overview screen 6-26
Software package
GRAPH 5
2-7
Standard function blocks
4-91, 4-178
Standard version
4-15, 4-37, 4-91
Starting up
4-87
example
4-165
Statement
deleting
4-31
Statement comment
4-25, 4-28
copying
4-58
exchanging
4-57
5-4
Static synchro%zation
Status analysis
inputloutput status
5-2
Status display
4-87
overview level
4-87 - 4-88
sequencer
4-87 - 4-88
zoom-in level
4-88
Status recognition
5-2, 5-5, 9-15
conditions
5-5, 9-15
process synchronization
5-5, 9-15
Step
2-7, 2-13, 9-15
active
9-7
adding
4-41
deleting
4-31

Appendix

inserting
4-42 - 4-43
programming
2-21, 4-61
search
4-55
Step enabling condition
2-3, 2-7, 2-13
transition
2-13
Step sequence diagnosis
6-28
Step sequence overview
6-25
Step-transition pair
4-41
Stepltransition
numbering
4-43
Structure
overview
2-26
Sub-sequence
4-7, 4-17, 4-81, 4-117
process synchronization5-6, 5-14, 9-15
Switching transition
9-16
Symbols file
9-16
example powder press
4-172
Sync no.
4-38
Sync sel
4-38
Synchronization
4-14
see process synchronization
search
5-14
see synchronization condition
Synchronization condition
5-7, 9-16
additional
5-21
additional negative
5-45
additional positive
5-44
automatic generation
9-16
editing options
5-21
evaluation
5-41, 5-47
example
5-37
flag 233.1
5-7, 5-17
generating automatically
5-6
multistep zoom-in
5-11, 5-17
negative
5-10, 5-19, 5-43
overview
positive
rules

saving
search
'l'

Target step
4-57 - 4-58
Target transition
4-57 - 4-58
Test
2-12
Testing
4-87
Time base
4-37
simultaneous branch
4-37
waiting and monitoring times
4-37
Time function
2-22, 9-15
Time value
2-22, 4-9, 4-50, 9-15
Timer
4-37
Timer function
4-50
Title
4-27
TM
2-22, 4-9, 4-50, 9-15
Transition
2-7, 2-13, 9-16
adding
4-41
criteria analysis
6-33
deleting
4-31
end condition
5-16
inserting
4-42 - 4-43
process synchronization, rules
5-4
programming
2-21, 4-61
search
4-55
switching
9-16
valid
9-17
Transition content
copying
4-58
exchanging
4-57
TW
2-22, 4-9, 4-50, 9-15

U
User DB
User interface

W
Waiting time
displaying
entering
Working DB

2-22, 4-57 - 4-58, 4-177

4-89
4-177
9-17

z
Zoom-in
4-26
multistep
4-68
Zoom-in content
copying
4-58
exchanging
4-57
Zoom-in function
key
4-23
Zoom-in key
4-23
Zoom-in level
2-8, 2-21, 4-28, 9-17
segment comment
4-29
statement comment
4-28
status display
4-88